Yamaha YSP-4100 Handleiding

Categorie
Ontvanger
Type
Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

English
for Europe, Asia, Africa, Oceania,
and Latin America
Owner’s Manual
Digital Sound Projector
TM
2 En
The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of Yamaha
Corporation.
The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered trademarks of
Yamaha Corporation.
The “ ” and “UniVolume” are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
The “ ” and “AirWired” are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS
logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. ©
1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under license from Cambridge Mechatronics Ltd. Worldwide
patents applied for.
The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector
” are trademarks of
Cambridge Mechatronics Ltd.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a trademark.
iPod™, iPhone™
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
About this manual
Make sure you read precautions in “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet) carefully before using this unit.
This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the
supplied owner’s manual for each component.
Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified.
y indicates a tip for your operation.
An illustration of the remote control in the left pages of this manual indicates the keys to be used in two facing (left and right) pages.
This manual is produced prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements,
etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority.
3 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Features........................................................................... 4
General operation flow .................................................. 5
Controls and functions................................................... 6
Front panel .........................................................................6
Front panel display.............................................................7
Rear panel...........................................................................8
Remote control ...................................................................9
Installation .................................................................... 10
Connections................................................................... 12
Before connecting components........................................12
Connecting external components .....................................12
Connecting a subwoofer...................................................13
Connecting the FM antenna .............................................14
Preparing the remote control...................................... 14
Installing batteries in the remote control..........................14
Operation range of the remote control .............................14
Changing OSD language.............................................. 15
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)....................................... 15
Installing the IntelliBeam microphone.............................15
Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ................................16
Using the system memory............................................ 19
Saving settings .................................................................19
Loading settings ...............................................................19
Playback ........................................................................ 21
Playing back sources........................................................21
Playing back TV sounds...................................................21
Playing back a player .......................................................21
Muting audio output.........................................................21
Decoder and input channel indicators..............................21
Playback mode.............................................................. 22
Selecting surround or stereo playback .............................22
Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs..................................22
Changing the audio output method for surround
playback........................................................................23
Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ...............24
Playing back 5.1-channel sources in
7.1-channel surround....................................................24
FM tuning ..................................................................... 25
Tuning into the desired FM station
(Frequency tuning) .......................................................25
Registering FM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning).....25
Displaying the Radio Data System information
(Europe model only).....................................................26
Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 27
Useful features .............................................................. 28
Adjusting volume level automatically (UniVolume).......28
Using the HDMI™ control function ................................28
Using the sleep timer........................................................28
Configuring settings for each input source
(Option menu) ..............................................................28
Displaying the input signal information...........................29
Customizing this unit (SET MENU)........................... 30
SET MENU items............................................................ 30
Basic SET MENU operation............................................ 31
MANUAL SETUP........................................................... 31
SOUND SET MENU....................................................... 33
SOUND OUT MENU...................................................... 34
INPUT MENU................................................................. 35
DISPLAY MENU............................................................ 36
System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) ......... 37
Using an external amplifier......................................... 38
Controlling external components ............................... 39
Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40
Glossary......................................................................... 43
Specifications ................................................................ 44
List of remote control codes ........................................ 45
Index.............................................................................. 52
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
PLAYBACK FEATURES
SETTINGS
APPENDIX
4 En
INTRODUCTION
Digital Sound Projector
The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim unit to
control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multi-
channel surround sound, thus eliminates the need for satellite
loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional
surround sound systems. This unit also employs the beam modes that
let you enjoy the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo+3 Beam, 3 Beam
for 5.1-channel audio, 5 Beam plus 2, Stereo + 3 Beam plus 2, 3
Beam for 7.1-channel audio) and 2-channel stereo playback.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
HDMI input x 4, HDMI output x 1
HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition video
(including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel
digital audio based on HDCP
Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information
capability
Deep Color video signal transmission capability
“x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability
High definition digital audio format signals capability
Multi-channel Linear PCM signal capability
Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external components
Functional link which enables the remote control of your TV to control
this unit (with an HDMI control-compatible TV)
Power mode switch capability (on/standby)
Volume adjustment capability
TV sounds reproduce device selection capability (this unit/TV)
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic
optimization technology with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam
microphone. You can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker
setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best
match your listening environment.
Cinema DSP
This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed by Yamaha
Electronics Corp. that lets you experience movies at home with all the
original dramatic sound impact.
UniVolume
This unit employs the automatic volume adjustment function. You
can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not increase
suddenly when whenever the contents being broadcast change (due to
commercials, etc.).
Various digital audio decoders includes newly added HD
audio decoder, and sound technologies
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby digital Surround EX, Dolby
Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Pro Logic II, Pro Logic IIx
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS 96/24,
DTS-ES, DTS, DTS-ES (discrete and matrix), DTS Neo: 6
Music Enhancer to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts
such as the MP3 format
Bass Extension to produce powerful bass sounds
Sophisticated FM tuner
40-station random and direct preset tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Radio Data System (Europe model only)
This unit employs the Radio Data System that is a data transmission
system used by FM stations.
Wireless connection (AirWired)
Wireless connection with iPod/iPhone, using Yamaha wireless transmitter
for iPod (PDX-50TX/PDX-50BC)
Wireless connection with subwoofer, using Yamaha wireless subwoofer
kit (SWK-W10) (not available in some countries)
iPod/iPhone interlock feature to turn on/off this unit or switch the input
source in conjunction with iPod/iPhone operations
Versatile Remote Control
The supplied remote control comes with preset remote control codes
used to control external components connected to this unit.
Features
5 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
1 Install this unit and connect to other components.
“Installation” (page 10), “Connections” (page 12).
2 Run AUTO SETUP to optimize the beam and sound settings.
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” (page 15).
3 Play back a source.
“Playback” (page 21).
4 Change the playback method (surround/stereo), CINEMA DSP and/or beam modes settings.
“Playback mode” (page 22).
5 Configure this unit’s settings and/or set remote control codes.
“Customizing this unit (SET MENU)” (page 30), “Controlling external components” (page 39).
General operation flow
6 En
1 Remote control sensor
Receives infrared signals from the remote control (page 14).
2 Power LED
Lights up when the power is turned on (page 21).
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit (page 7).
4 INPUT
Press repeatedly to switch between input sources.
5 VOLUME +/
Controls the volume level of all audio channels.
Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum)
6 Power (p) key
Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode
(page 21).
Note
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to
receive infrared signals from the remote control or to search for HDMI
signals.
7 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack
Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO SETUP
(page 15).
Controls and functions
Front panel
INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC
64 7
321
5
7 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
1 UNIVOLUME indicator
Lights up when the UniVolume function is turned on (page 28).
2 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field program is selected (page 22).
3 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input from
the HDMI IN jack(s).
4 Tuner indicators
Light up when this unit is tuned into an FM station (page 25).
5 Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only)
Show the current Radio Data System status (page 26).
6 Wireless indicators
TRNS Lights up when a wireless connection is established
between the Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWK-
W10) and this unit (page 13).
RECV Lights up when a wireless connection is established
between the Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX-
50TX) and this unit (page 27).
7 Decoder indicators
Light up when the corresponding decoder operates
(page 21).
8 SLEEP indicator
Lights up when the sleep timer is set (page 28).
9 Volume level indicator
Displays the current volume level.
0 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (page 34).
A BASS EXT indicator
Lights up when the bass extension mode is turned on (page 34).
B PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
C Multi-information display
Shows information with alphanumeric characters when you adjust the
parameters of this unit. Current input source and audio output method
are displayed when this unit is turned on.
D Input channel indicators
The channel component of the current input signal is displayed
(page 21).
Front panel display
L C R
SL SB SR
EX1 LFE EX2
O
m
ft
dB
AUTO
UNIVOLUME
ENHANCER
BASS EXT
MEMORY
PS PTY RT CT
PCM
ES DSCRT MTRX
SLEEP
VOL
TUNED STEREO
RECVTRNS
HD MSTR HI
RES
Neo:6
96
24
q
DIGITAL PLUS
q
EX
q
TRUE HD
q
PL x
64 5 78921 3
D
CA0 B
8 En
Note
The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this
unit.
1 HDMI jacks
Connect your HDMI components (page 12).
2 FM ANTENNA jack
Connect the FM antenna (page 14).
3 VIDEO jacks
Connect to the video jacks of your external components (page 12).
4 SUBWOOFER jack
Connect your subwoofer (page 13).
5 AUDIO IN jacks
Connect to the analog audio output jacks of your external
components (page 12).
6 DIGITAL IN jacks
Connect to the digital audio output jacks of your external components
(page 12).
7 IR IN terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only.
8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal
Use to connect a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM
CONNECTOR terminal to this unit (page 13).
9 RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only.
0 AC IN
Connect the supplied power cable (page 12).
A IR-OUT terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only.
B PRE OUT jacks
Connect your external amplifier (page 38).
Rear panel
AUX 1 TV
OUT
HDMI
AUX 2AUX 1 TVOUTIN
FRONT
PRE OUT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
CENTER
L
R
L
R
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
IR IN
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR
SUB
WOOFER
COMPONENT
DIGITAL INAUDIO INVIDEO
RS-232C
VIDEOVIDEO
Y
P
R PB
RR
LL
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
IR-OUT
AC IN
IR-OUT
OUT
HDMI
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
FM ANTENNA
FRONT
PRE OUT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
AUX 1 TVAUX 2AUX 1 TVOUTIN
IR IN
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR
SUB
WOOFER
COMPONENT
DIGITAL INAUDIO INVIDEO
RS-232C
1
0
7
A
2
93 5 6
B
4 8
9 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Note
When operating the keys located on the slide cover (INFO, SLEEP, etc.),
close the slide cover completely before operation.
A Transmission indicator
Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.
B TV (p)
Turns on the power of your TV or set it to the standby mode
(page 39).
B AV (p)
Turns on the power of the selected component or set it to the standby
mode (page 39).
C Power (p) key
Turns on the power of this unit or set it to the standby mode
(page 21).
D Input selector keys
Use to select an input source (page 21). An input source key currently
selected lights up when the remote control is operated.
E CINEMA DSP program keys
Select the CINEMA DSP programs (page 22).
F SURROUND/STEREO
Switches between surround and stereo playback (page 22).
G Cursor ( / / / ) keys, ENTER
Select and adjust menu items.
H TOP MENU
Displays the top menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD (page 39).
H MENU
Displays the menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD (page 39).
I OPTION
Displays the option menu (page 28). The remote control turns to
setting mode (ISETUP lights up).
I SETUP
Displays the SETUP menu (page 30). Press and hold to directly enter
the LANGUAGE SETUP menu (page 15). Lights up when the
remote control is turned into the setting mode of the main unit.
I RETURN
Returns to the previous menu screen (page 31).
J CH /
Changes the channels of your TV/recorder (page 39).
K VOLUME +/
Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (page 21).
K MUTE
Mutes the sound. (page 21).
L TV operation keys
Use to control your TV (page 39).
M UNIVOLUME
Turns on or off the UniVolume function (page 28).
M SUR.DECODE
Selects a decoder for surround playback (page 24). The remote
control turns to setting mode (ISETUP lights up).
M INTELLIBEAM
Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (page 16). The remote control turns
to setting mode (ISETUP lights up).
N Numeric keys
Use to enter numbers.
O CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external component operations
(page 39).
P Tuner / external component operation keys
Use to select or preset an FM station or control playback of your
external components (pages 25 and 39).
Q SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (page 28).
R INFO
Displays information about signals currently input to this unit
(page 29). Select the desired Radio Data System display mode
(Europe model only) (page 26).
Remote control
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
M
N
O
P
Q
R
L
10 En
PREPARATION
This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a wall mount bracket, a rack, a table top stand or a floor stand. To
achieve desired surround sound effects, install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams
(page 11). Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (page 12) should be done before installation.
Notes
Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat
can escape. We recommend installing this unit using a wall mount bracket, a
rack, a table top stand or a floor stand.
Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as
from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children.
When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly
above your TV.
If the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we
recommend moving this unit away from your TV.
Attach the stands
Attach the supplied stands to this unit as shown below. Make sure that
you attach the left and right stands correctly. These stands are
unnecessary if you use the optional wall mount bracket.
Note
Depending on a rack, table top stand, or floor stand, the stands may not be
necessary.
Using a rack
You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a
commercially available rack.
It should be large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around
this unit and strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and
your TV.
Using a wall mount bracket
You can use the optional wall mount bracket (such as SPM-K30) to
mount this unit on the wall in your listening room.
Attachment of the wall mount bracket: refer to the owner’s manual
supplied with the wall mount bracket.
Using a table top stand or a floor stand
You can mount both your TV and this unit on a commercially
available table top stand or floor stand.
Installation
Screws (for stands, supplied)
Left stand (supplied)
Right stand (supplied)
TV
This unit
When this unit is installed above your TV
When this unit is installed under your TV
92
112
730
730
235 355 235355
26
26
74
92
112
4- 7
4- 7
24- 7x22
150 355 150355
74
24- 7x22
18
107
(mm)
(mm)
This unit
TV
Wall mount bracket
YSP-5100
SPM-K30 (Option)
YSP-4100
Dimensions when using SPM-K30
11 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Ideal installation condition
For better listening environment
Example 1
Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible.
Example 2
Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls.
Example 3
Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible.
: Object such as furniture
Parallel installation (with 5 Beam)
Corner installation (with Stereo+3Beam)
40° to 50°
12 En
Cables used for connections
The symbols on the left of cable names (such as , , and )
correspond with the symbols described in “Connecting your TV and
Blu-ray disc player” (page 12) and “Connecting audio video
components” (page 13).
For audio and video
HDMI cable
For audio
Audio pin cable (supplied)
Optical cable (supplied)
Digital audio pin cable (supplied)
For video
Video pin cable (supplied)
Component video pin cable
Information on HDMI
An HDMI cable can transmit both audio and video signals at the
same time. If your TV and other components have HDMI jacks, use
HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections.
See also: “Using the HDMI control function” (page 28), “INPUT
MENU” (page 35)
y
This unit automatically converts input video signals and outputs the signals
from the HDMI OUT jack.
The HDMI of this unit supports High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection
(HDCP),
We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (16 ft) with
the HDMI logo printed on it.
Priority order for audio input signals
When digital and analog audio signals are simultaneously input from
a single source component, this unit plays back digital audio signals
by priority. For example, if audio signals are input to the DIGITAL
IN (AUX 1) and AUDIO IN (AUX 1) jacks simultaneously, this unit
plays back audio signals input to the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack
when “AUX1” is selected as the input source.
Connect external components (TV, Blu-ray disc player, etc.) to this unit. Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
Connecting your TV and Blu-ray disc player
The following connection example shows a way to connect your TV and Blu-ray disc player by using the HDMI jacks. When you connect them
by using the other jacks, refer to “Connecting audio and video components” (page 13). The symbols beside the cables correspond with the
symbols described in “Cables used for connections” (page 12).
Connections
Before connecting components
Input source Audio signal type
Blu-ray disc
HD DVD
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD
Master Audio, 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM
DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, 2-channel PCM, multi-channel
PCM
DVD audio 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM
Connecting external components
Optical digital
output
HDMI
output
HDMI
input
OUT
HDMI
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
AUX 1 TVAUX 2
DIGITAL IN
TV
Power cable
to AC wall outlet
1. Pull out the cap
(if attached)
2. Check the direction
Blu-ray disc player
13 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Connecting audio and video components
Determine the connection types depending on the jacks available on this unit and your external components. The symbols in the following table
correspond with the symbols described in “Cables used for connections” (page 12).
y
Video signals input from the VIDEO IN (VIDEO) jack can be output not only to the VIDEO OUT jack but also the HDMI OUT jack. Video signals input from
the VIDEO IN (COMPONENT) jacks are output to the HDMI OUT jack.
Wireline connection
Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the
SUBWOOFER jack on this unit.
y
If the subwoofer is connected by using a system type connection, changing
the power mode of this unit controls the power mode of the subwoofer
(Yamaha subwoofer).
Wireless connection
You can make a wireless connection of your subwoofer by using the
Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWK-W10). About SWK-W10,
refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet).
See also: “WIRELESS SETUP” (page 36)
y
For proper transmission, you need to set the group IDs of this unit and
SWK-W10 to the same value. For the Group ID settings, refer to “Group
ID” (page 36) and “Safety and Accessory Information (separate booklet)”.
Note
Be sure to use the product only in the country in where it was purchased.
External component Signal type
Jacks to use
Cable to
use
Input selection
key
On external component On this unit
TV Video Composite video input VIDEO OUT
Audio Analog audio output AUDIO IN (TV) TV
External component
with HDMI output
Audio/video HDMI output HDMI IN 1-4 HDMI1-4
External component
with component video
output
Audio Coaxial digital output DIGITAL IN (AUX 2) AUX2
Video Component video output VIDEO IN (COMPONENT)
External component
with composite video
output
Audio Optical digital output DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) AUX1
Analog audio output AUDIO IN (AUX 1)
Video Composite video output VIDEO IN (VIDEO)
Connecting a subwoofer
AUX 1 TV
HDMI
AUX 2AUX 1 TVOUTIN
IR IN
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR
SUB
WOOFER
COMPONENT
DIGITAL INAUDI O INVIDEO
RS-232C
VIDEOVIDEO
Y
P
R PB
RR
LL
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
DIGITAL INAUDIO INVIDEO
VIDEO IN/OUT
jacks
AUDIO IN
jacks
DIGITAL IN
jacks
HDMI IN
jacks
AUX 1 TVAUX 2AUX 1 TVOUT
IR IN
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR
SUB
WOOFER
DIGITAL INAUDIO IN
RS-232C
Monaural input System connector
INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC
SWK-W10
Subwoofer
14 En
Connect the supplied FM antenna or your antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit.
Note
Before installing batteries or using the remote control, make
sure that you read precautions on the remote control and
batteries in “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate
booklet).
1 Pull and hold the tab on the battery cover
and then open the cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries (R03P, UM4,
AAA) into the battery compartment.
Make sure you insert the batteries according to the
polarity markings (+/–).
3 Close the battery cover.
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and
point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit
during operation.
Connecting the FM antenna
Preparing the remote control
FM ANTENNA
Antenna
Installing batteries in the remote
control
Pull and hold
Operation range of the remote
control
INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC
Within
6m (20ft)
30° 30°
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
GENTER
G /
ISETUP
15 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES
Changing OSD
language
AUTO SETUP
(IntelliBeam)
Using the system
memory
SETTINGS
You can select an OSD language among English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch and Russian. Before operating
the following steps, select this unit as the video input on your TV.
1 Press and hold ISETUP until the
“LANGUAGE SETUP” menu appears on your
TV.
2 Press G / to select the desired
language and then press GENTER.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),
Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish),
ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch),
Русский (Russian)
Initial setting: ENGLISH (English)
3 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP.
This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams off the walls of your listening room and by broadening the
cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the
beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit.
Notes
After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone.
The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat.
Keep the IntelliBeam microphone away from direct sunlight.
Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone on top of this unit.
You cannot use the AUTO SETUP when “PREOUT” is selected in “SOUND OUT” (page 35).
You cannot run the AUTO SETUP while playing back the iPod/iPhone by using PDX-50TX. To run the AUTO SETUP, stop playback
and then disconnect the iPod/iPhone from PDX-50TX. About PDX-50TX, refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate
booklet).
Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam
microphone to this unit and place it in a proper location.
1 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam
microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on
the front panel.
2 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat
level surface at your normal listening
position.
Place the IntelliBeam microphone on the extended
center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more
away from it. Also, make sure place the IntelliBeam
microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from
the center height of this unit.
y
Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod
to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as
your ears would be when you are seated.
Changing OSD language
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
Francais
ESPANOL
ITALIANO
NEDERLANDS
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
3)LANGUAGE SETUP
p
p
.
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
Installing the IntelliBeam
microphone
INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC
INTELLIBEAM MIC
IntelliBeam microphone
1.8 m (6.0 ft)
or more
Within 1 m (3.3 ft)
Cardboard
microphone stand
Listening
position
Upper limit
Lower limit
Center height of
this unit
Within 1 m (3.3 ft)
IntelliBeam
microphone
Cardboard
microphone
stand
Center line
16 En
Assembling the supplied cardboard
microphone stand
y
If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover frequency
controls is connected to this unit, turn it on, set the volume to
about half way and then set the crossover frequency to the
maximum as shown below.
You can select one of the following AUTO SETUP types
depending on your purpose.
“BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ”
“BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY”
“SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY”
Notes
It is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO
SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around
in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in
progress.
Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. For
accurate measurement, turn off air conditioner or other devices
that make noises.
To achieve the best results possible, vacate your listening room
until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may
not obstruct the path of sound beams.
If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend
following the procedure below.
1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection.
2. Run “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY”.
3. Close the curtains.
4. Run “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY”.
y
To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press
IRETURN.
1 Press ISETUP.
The remote control keys to be used and available
operations in each step are displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
y
You can also start the “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ
procedure simply by holding down MINTELLIBEAM for
more than two seconds. In this case, proceed to step 4.
Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
(Beam optimization and sound optimization)
Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and
quality so that the parameters best match your listening
environment. It is recommended that you should select
this optimization feature in the following cases:
If you make settings for the first time
If the unit has been relocated
If your listening room has been restructured
If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.)
have been rearranged
This menu takes about three minutes.
12
34
5
Remove
Fit in
Fit in
Place horizontally
Run through
VOLUME
MIN MAX MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
Subwoofer
(Beam optimization only)
Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter
best matches your listening environment.
This menu takes about one minute.
(Sound optimization only)
Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so
that the parameters best match your listening
environment. You must optimize the beam angle with
“BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” before starting “SOUND
OPTIMZ ONLY”. It is recommended that you should
select this optimization feature in the following cases:
If you have opened or closed the curtains in your
listening room before using this unit
If you have manually set the beam angle.
This menu takes about three minutes.
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;SOUND SET MENU
;SOUND OUT MENU
;INPUT MENU
;DISPLAY MENU
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
M
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
GENTER
G /
IRETURN
ISETUP
MINTELLIBEAM
17 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES
Changing OSD
language
AUTO SETUP
(IntelliBeam)
Using the system
memory
SETTINGS
2 Press G / to select “AUTO SETUP” and
then press GENTER.
3 Press G / to select “BEAM+SOUND
OPTIMZ”, “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” or “SOUND
OPTIMZ ONLY” and then press GENTER.
4 Prepare to leave the room.
The best setting may not be done if you are in the
room. Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after
pressing GENTER in step 5.
y
Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP
procedure.
The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes.
To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started,
press IRETURN.
5 Press GENTER to start the AUTO SETUP
procedure and then leave the room within 10
seconds.
The setup screen automatically changes during the
AUTO SETUP procedure.
If an error occurs, an error buzzer sounds and an error
message is displayed. For details on error messages,
see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” (page 18).
If the AUTO SETUP procedure is complete, this unit
rings the chimes.
y
If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed,
refer to “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” (page 18),
press IRETURN, and then run the AUTO SETUP
procedure again.
If “SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed
even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit and
turned on, check the connection and then increase the
volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP
procedure again.
Depending on the environment of your listening room, the
beam angles of front right and left and surround left and
right may be set to the same value even if “BEAM MODE
:5 BEAM” is displayed as a result.
6 Press GENTER to confirm the results.
The menu screen disappears in two seconds.
y
If you do not want to reflect the results, press IRETURN.
7 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone.
The measurement results are stored in the internal
memory of this unit until you run the AUTO SETUP
procedure again or configure the settings manually.
1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ
2)BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY
3)SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
B)AUTO SETUP
p
p
PREPARATION & CHECK
Please connect the MIC.
Please place the MIC at least
1.8m/6ft away from the unit.
The MIC should be set
at ear level when seated.
Measurement takes about 3min.
After [ENTER] is pressed,
please leave the room.
[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel
AUTO SETUP
Will begin in 10sec
Please leave the room
*--------
[RETURN]:Cancel
AUTO SETUP START
MEASUREMENT COMPLETE
BEAM MODE :5Beam/Plus2
SUBWOOFER :YES
[ENTER]:Save set-up.
[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.
XXXXXXXXSHOW RESULTXXXXXXXXXX
AUTO SETUP COMPLETE
Please remove the MIC from
the unit and the listening
position.
INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC
18 En
Error messages for AUTO SETUP
If an error message is displayed on your TV, check the error message list to solve the problem and then follow the
procedure below.
[ERROR E-1]: Press GENTER to run the AUTO SETUP procedure again or IRETURN to cancel the operation
Other errors: Press IRETURN to cancel the operation and then run the AUTO SETUP procedure again.
Note
If the problem is difficult to be solved, configure the settings manually in “MANUAL SETUP” (page 31).
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
ERROR E-1
Please test in quieter environment.
There is too much unwanted noise in
your listening room.
Make sure that your listening room is as
quiet as possible. You may want to
choose certain hours during the day
when there is not much noise coming
from outside.
ERROR E-2
No MIC detected. Please check
MIC connection and re-try.
The IntelliBeam microphone is not
connected to this unit or disconnected
during the AUTO SETUP procedure.
Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to
this unit firmly.
15
ERROR E-3
Unexpected control is detected.
Please re-try.
Some other operations were performed
on this unit while the AUTO SETUP
procedure was in progress.
Do not perform any other operations
while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in
progress.
ERROR E-4
Please check MIC position. MIC
should be set in front of the unit
and re-try.
The IntelliBeam microphone is not
placed in front of this unit.
Make sure that the IntelliBeam
microphone is installed in front of this
unit.
15
ERROR E-5
Please check MIC position. MIC
should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft and
re-try.
The IntelliBeam microphone is not
placed in the right distance from this
unit.
Make sure that the IntelliBeam
microphone is installed more than 1.8 m
(6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and
within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height
of this unit.
15
ERROR E-6
Volume level is lower than
expected. Please check MIC
position/connection and re-try.
The IntelliBeam microphone cannot
collect the sound produced by this unit
because the sound output level is too low.
Make sure that the IntelliBeam
microphone is firmly connected to this
unit and placed in a proper location. If
the problem persists, contact the nearest
authorized Yamaha service center for
assistance.
15
ERROR E-7
Unexpected error happened.
Please re-try.
An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure.
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
GENTER
G /
IRETURN
ISETUP
19 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES
Changing OSD
language
AUTO SETUP
(IntelliBeam)
Using the system
memory
SETTINGS
You can save the current beam and sound settings in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings
according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of sound
beams, the effectiveness of the sound beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed.
y
If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below.
1. While the curtains are open, run “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ” (page 16) and then save the settings to “MEMORY1”.
2. While the curtains are closed, run “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY” (page 16) and then save the settings to “MEMORY2”.
1 Press ISETUP.
2 Press GENTER.
3 Press G / to select “SAVE” and then
press GENTER.
4 Press G / to select the desired
memory number and then press GENTER.
y
If system settings are already stored in the selected memory
number, this unit overwrites the old settings.
5 Press GENTER.
The current beam and sound settings are saved to the
selected memory number.
1 Press ISETUP.
2 Press GENTER.
3 Press GENTER again.
Using the system memory
Saving settings
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;SOUND SET MENU
;SOUND OUT MENU
;INPUT MENU
;DISPLAY MENU
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
1)LOAD
2)SAVE
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
A)MEMORY
p
p
a)MEMORY1
b)MEMORY2
c)MEMORY3
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
2)MEMORY SAVE
p
p
MEMORY1 Save Now?
[ENTER]:Enter
2)MEMORY SAVE
Loading settings
MEMORY1 Saving...
2)MEMORY SAVE
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;SOUND SET MENU
;SOUND OUT MENU
;INPUT MENU
;DISPLAY MENU
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
1)LOAD
2)SAVE
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
A)MEMORY
p
p
a)MEMORY1
b)MEMORY2
c)MEMORY3
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1)MEMORY LOAD
p
p
20 En
4 Press G / to select the memory
number to be loaded and then press
GENTER.
5 Press GENTER.
The beam and sound settings saved in the selected
memory number are loaded.
MEMORY1 Load Now ?
Push [ENTER] to Load
1)MEMORY LOAD
MEMORY1 Loading...
1)MEMORY LOAD
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
ENTER
G
C
MUTE
K
HDMI 4 iPod
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
D
FM
CPower
DAUX1/2
DHDMI1
DHDMI1-4
DInput selector keys
DTV
GENTER
G /
KMUTE
KVOLUME +/
21 En
INTRODUCTION SETTINGS APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES
Playback
Playback mode
FM tuning
Playing back iPod™
Useful features
PREPARATION
Changing OSD
language
AUTO SETUP
(IntelliBeam)
Using the system
memory
PLAYBACK FEATURES
This section describes how to playback source input from
your external components. For details on your external
components, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with
each component.
1 Press CPower (p) key to turn on this unit.
2 Turn on external components (TV, Blu-ray
disc player, etc.) connected to this unit.
3 Press one of the DInput selector keys to
select an external component as an input
source.
y
You can change the input source name displayed on the
front panel display (page 35).
4 Start playback of the external component
that you have selected as the input source,
or select a radio station on the tuner.
FM tuning (page 25)
Playing back iPod/iPhone (page 27)
5 Press KVOLUME +/– to adjust the volume.
6 Press CPower (p) key to turn this unit to the
standby mode.
1 Select the desired TV channel.
2 Press DTV to select the TV as the input
source.
3 Mute the sound output on the TV.
1 Select the player as the video input on the TV.
2 Press DHDMI1-4 or DAUX1/2 to select the
player as the input source.
For example, if the player is connected to the HDMI
IN 1 jack of this unit, press DHDMI1.
3 Start playback of the player.
4 Mute the sound output on the TV.
y
If your player supports the HD audio, check whether the audio
output setting on the player is set to the value which supports
HD audio output (“Auto”, “Bitstream”, etc.).
If your player does not support the HD audio, check whether the
audio output setting on the player is set to multi-channel linear
PCM.
If your player is connected to this unit through the digital
connection, check whether the audio output setting on the
player is set to digital output (“Bitstream”, “Dolby Digital”,
“DTS”, etc.).
To enhance the surround sound effect, set the audio setting of
your player to the multi-channel audio mode.
You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the
digital signals being input from the player through the digital
connection (HDMI, optical or coaxial). The
indicator lights up when this unit detects the digital audio signal
input.
1 Press KMUTE to mute the audio output.
2 Press KMUTE again to resume audio output.
Decoder indicators
Depending on the input source and the selected decoder,
the indicators in the front panel display light up as follows:
Playback
Playing back sources
Playing back TV sounds
HDMI1
Input source name
Volume 40
Volume
Playing back a player
Muting audio output
Decoder and input channel
indicators
DIGITAL
22 En
y
You can select an audio signal to be played back (Auto or DTS)
In “Decoder Mode” (page 29).
Input channel indicators
Depending on the channel component of the current
digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the
front panel display light up as follows:
y
Extra (EX1/EX2) indicators light up when 7.1-channnel signals
recorded in a Blu-lay disc (etc.) are being input. Normally,
surround back channel signals are recorded in the extra
channels. This may vary depending on the disc.
You can select the playback method (surround or stereo), desired CINEMA DSP program and decoder to enjoy playback
of the input source.
Use to select the playback method (surround or stereo).
See also: “ Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs” (page 22),
“Changing the audio output method for surround
playback” (page 23).
Press FSURROUND or FSTEREO.
You can enjoy high realistic sensation with surround
playback and hi-fi sound with stereo playback.
y
Normal sounds (not sound beams) are output from the front
right and front left channels. When you play back multi-channel
sources, all signals except those from the front right and left
channels are mixed down and output from the front right and
left channels.
When the stereo playback is selected, CINEMA DSP (page 22)
and the decoder (page 24) become ineffective.
This unit is equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP
(digital sound field processing) chip containing several
sound field programs used to enhance your playback
experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP programs are
precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments
of famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
When you enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs, press F
SURROUND to select the surround playback, and then follow
the steps below.
The CINEMA DSP programs are not available in the following
conditions.
Stereo playback is selected.
HD audio signals are being played back.
– Audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz
are being played back.
Audio signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks.
Status Indicator
When PCM signals are being
input
When Dolby TrueHD signals are
being input
When Dolby Digital Plus signals
are being input
When Dolby Digital signals are
being input
When Dolby Pro Logic is
selected as the surround decoder
When Dolby Pro Logic II is
selected as the surround decoder
When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is
selected as the surround decoder
When DTS HD Master Audio
signals are being input
+ HD + MSTR
When DTS HD High Resolution
signals are being input
+ HD + HI RES
When DTS digital signals are
being input
When DTS 96/24 signals are
being input
+
When DTS ES discrete is
selected as the surround decoder
+ ES + DSCRT
When DTS ES matrix is selected
as the surround decoder
+ ES + MTRX
When DTS Neo:6 is selected as
the surround decoder
+ Neo:6
PCM
DIGITAL
PL
PL
Input signal Indicator
2-channel stereo
5.1-channel
6.1-channel
7.1-channel
L C R
SL SB SR
EX1 LFE EX2
Center
Front L
Surround L
Extra 1
Surround back
Front R
Surround R
Extra 2
LFE
Playback mode
Selecting surround or stereo
playback
Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs
ECINEMA DSP
EOFF
FSTEREO
FSURROUND
GENTER
G /
G /
G
ISETUP
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
E
F
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
23 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION SETTINGS APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES
Playback
Playback mode
FM tuning
Playing back iPod™
Useful features
1 Press the desired ECINEMA DSP key.
The CINEMA DSP category name appears in the
front panel display and the CINEMA DSP indicator
(page 7) lights up.
2 While the category name is displayed, press
the ECINEMA DSP key repeatedly.
Each time you press the key, program switches.
y
To turn off the CINEMA DSP program, press
EOFF.
Movie (MOVIE)
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces dialogs and special
sound effects of the latest science fiction films and lets
you feel a broad and expansive cinematic space.
Adventure
This program reproduces the thrilling environment of the
latest action films and lets you feel the dynamic and
excitement of fast-moving scenes.
Spectacle
This program reproduces the wide and grand environment
and lets you have added impressions on spectacular scenes
with strong visual impacts.
Music (MUSIC)
Music Video
This program produces a vibrant environment and lets you
feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.
Concert Hall
This program creates a rich surround effect of a large
round concert hall with a great deal of presence,
emphasizing the extension of sounds, and lets you feel as
if you are seated close to the center of the stage.
Jazz Club
This program recreates the acoustic environment of “The
Bottom Line”, a famous jazz club in New York once and
lets you feel as if you are seated right in front of the stage.
Entertainment (ENTERTAINMENT)
Sports
This program reproduces the energetic environment of live
sports broadcasting, converging a commentator’s voice on
the center and broadening the overall atmosphere of the
stadium, and lets you feel as if you are seated at an actual
stadium or a ball park.
Talk Show
This program reproduces excitement of live talk shows. It
enhances the ambience of gaiety while keeping the
conversations at a comfortable volume.
Drama
This program stables reverberations that match a wide
range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals
and comedies, and offers an optimum 3D feeling,
reproducing effects tones and background music softly but
cubically around clear words.
Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure
games. It utilizes the sound field effects for movies to
represent the depth and spatial feeling of the field during
play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the
movie scenes in the game.
Mch Stereo
This program downmixes multi-channel source to 2
channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers and
produces stereo sounds in wide range. It is ideal for
background music at parties, etc.
You can set the number of beam output channels and
audio output method.
1 Press ISETUP.
The “SET MENU” screen appears on the TV.
2 Use G / and GENTER to select
“SOUND OUT MENU”- “SOUND BEAM OUT
CONFIG” - “CHANNEL OUT”.
3 Press G / to select the number of output
channels.
Choices: 5.1ch, 7.1ch
Initial setting: 7.1ch
4 Press G to select “BEAM MODE”.
5 Press G to select the desired audio
output method.
6 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP.
Beam modes for “5.1ch”
5 Beam
Outputs sound beams from the front right and left, center,
and surround right and left channels. This mode is ideal
for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when
you watch 5.1-channel audio discs.
Stereo+3Beam
Outputs normal sound from the front right and left
channels and sound beams from the center and surround
right and left channels. This mode is ideal for watching
live recordings on a DVD.
Changing the audio output method
for surround playback
24 En
3 Beam
Outputs sound beams from the front right and left and
center channels. For playback of multi-channel sources,
surround right and left channel sources are mixed into the
front right and left channels. This mode is ideal for
enjoying movies with the whole family. In addition, you
can use this mode when the listening position is close to
the backside of the wall.
Beam modes for “7.1ch”
5Beam Plus2
Outputs sound beams from the front right and left, center,
and surround back right and left channels. Surround right
and left channel sources are mixed into the front right and
left and surround back right and left channels. This mode
is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest
when you watch 7.1-channel audio discs.
ST+3BeamPlus2
Outputs normal sound from the front right and left
channels and sound beams from the center and surround
back right and left channels. Surround right and left
channel sounds are output by using front right and left
channel sound and surround back right and left sound
beams. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on
a DVD.
3 Beam
Outputs sound beams from the front right and left and
center channels. For playback of multi-channel sources,
surround right and left and surround back right and left
channel sources are mixed into the front right and left
channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the
whole family. In addition, you can use this mode when the
listening position is close to the backside of the wall.
This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 7.1-channel or
5.1-channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of
surround sound effects by switching the decoder.
y
The decoders are available only when surround playback
(page 22) is selected.
Available decoders vary depending on the “CHANNEL OUT”
setting (page 23).
Press MSUR.DECODE repeatedly to switch
between decoders.
2ch 5ch
2ch 7ch
This unit decodes 5.1-channel sources and then playback
them in up to 7.1-channel surround. One of the following
decoders is automatically selected depending on the input
signals. Set “CHANNEL OUT” to “7.1ch” (
page 23).
y
Press MSUR.DECODE to switch between Dolby Pro Logic
Movie and Music. To switch to the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
decoder, select “PLIIxMusic”. To switch to the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder, select one of the decoders other than
“PLIIxMusic”.
Enjoying 2-channel sources
in surround sound
Decoder
Recommended
source
Pro Logic
(Dolby Pro Logic)
All sources
PLII
(Dolby Pro Logic II)
Movie
Music
Game
Movies
Music
Games
Neo:6
(DTS Neo:6)
Cinema
Music
Movies
Music
Decoder
Recommended
source
PLIIx
(Dolby Pro Logic
IIx)
Movie
Music
Game
Movies
Music
Games
Neo:6
(DTS Neo:6)
Cinema
Music
Movies
Music
Playing back 5.1-channel sources
in 7.1-channel surround
5.1ch input source Decoder
PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby TrueHD,
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie/
Music
DTS Digital, DTS ES matrix,
DTS HD Master Audio, DTS
HD High Resolution Audio
DTS ES matrix
DTS ES discrete DTS ES discrete
DRADIO
GENTER
G /
IOPTION
IRETURN
MSUR.DECODE
NNumeric keys
PTUNING /
PMEMORY
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
M
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
HDMI 4 iPod
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
D
FM
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
N
MEMORY
P
25 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION SETTINGS APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES
Playback
Playback mode
FM tuning
Playing back iPod™
Useful features
The FM tuner of this unit provides the following two
modes for tuning.
Frequency tuning mode
You can tune into a desired FM station by searching or
specifying its frequency.
Preset tuning mode
You can preset the frequencies of FM stations by
registering them to specific numbers, and later just
select those numbers to tune into.
Note
Adjust the FM antenna connected to this unit for the best
reception.
1 Press DFM to select the FM station as the
input source.
Note
If you select “FM” with INPUT on the front panel, press
DFM on the remote control prior to step 2 so that you can
operate the procedures from step 2.
2 Press PTUNING / to specify the
frequency.
The TUNED indicator on the front panel display
lights up when the tuner is tuned into a station. The
STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being
broadcasted is in stereo.
See also: “FM Mode” (page 29)
The frequency changes in the following manner
according to how you press PTUNING / .
When you press the key more than 1 second
The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is
detectable around the current frequency. This is
effective when the tuner can receive strong signals
without any interference. Once the search starts,
release the key. When you keep holding the key, the
search continues even when a station is detected. This
is useful when you want to tune in to a specific
station.
When you press and release the key
The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in
steps. Use this method when the tuner cannot receive
strong signals and stations are skipped during the
search.
3 To directly specify the frequency, use
NNumeric keys to enter the frequency of the
station.
Note
When you press NNumeric keys during preset tuning, a
preset number is selected. Set the tuner to the frequency
tuning mode using PTUNING / prior to the
operation.
You do not need to enter zero if it comes at the end of a
decimal number. For example, enter “889” for “88.90
MHz” or “94” for “94.00 MHz”.
y
The reception is noisy and the sound is hard to listen,
switch to monaural mode to get better reception. In the
option menu, select “Mono” in “FM Mode” (page 29).
You can register up to 40 FM stations automatically or
manually.
Registering stations automatically
The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong
signals and registers up to 40 stations.
Note
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored
automatically by automatic station registration.
1 Press DFM to select the FM station as the
input source.
2 Press IOPTION.
The option menu (page 28) appears on the front panel
display.
3 Press G / to select “Auto Preset” and
then press GENTER.
This unit starts to preset FM radio stations in 5
seconds.
y
You can select the preset number at which the preset starts
by pressing G / after pressing GENTER.
To cancel the operation, press IRETURN.
If auto preset is complete, “Preset Complete”
appears.
4 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION.
Registering stations manually
You can manually register FM stations with weak signals.
1 Tune into the desired FM station.
2 Press PMEMORY.
FM tuning
Tuning into the desired FM station
(Frequency tuning)
TUNED STEREO
XXXFMX 88.90 MHz
Lights up
Registering FM stations and tuning
in (Preset tuning)
3.Auto Preset
AUTO
MEMORY
P01:FM 87.50MHz
Preset number Frequency
26 En
“Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display,
followed soon by the preset number to which the
station will be registered.
y
By holding down PMEMORY for more than 2 seconds,
you can skip the following steps and automatically register
the selected station to an empty preset number (next to the
lastly-registered preset number).
3 Press PPRESET / to select the preset
number to which the station will be
registered.
When you select a preset number to which no station
is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a
preset number to which any station has been already
registered, the frequency of the station is displayed.
y
You can also specify a preset number using the NNumeric
keys.
4 Press PMEMORY.
When registration is complete, the front panel display
returns to the original state.
y
To cancel registration, press IRETURN or leave this unit
without any operations for about 30 seconds.
Calling a preset station (Preset tuning)
You can call preset stations registered automatically or
manually.
Press PPRESET / to select the desired
preset number.
y
Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped.
“No Presets” is displayed if no stations are registered.
You can directly select a preset number by pressing the
NNumeric keys while calling a preset station.
When you press NNumeric keys during normal frequency
tuning, a frequency is entered. Set the tuner to the preset tuning
mode using PTUNING / prior to the operation.
Clearing preset stations
Use to clear the preset FM stations.
1 Press DFM to select the FM station as the
input source.
2 Press IOPTION.
The option menu (page 28) appears on the front panel
display.
3 Press G / to select “Clear Preset” and
then press GENTER.
A preset station is displayed.
y
To cancel the clearing operation, press IRETURN.
4 Press G / to select a preset station to
be cleared, and then press GENTER.
The selected preset station is cleared. If the operation
is completed, “Cleared” appears. To clear the
multiple preset stations, repeat step 4.
5 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION.
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by
FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio
Data System information: PS (program service), PTY
(program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display.
Notes
You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when
the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the
front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive
all of the Radio Data System data from the station.
If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
display modes are available.
In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired
station manually (page 25).
In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference
while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the
reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in
the front panel display.
If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into
the Radio Data System broadcasting stations
(page 25).
Note
The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency
display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station
broadcasts the PS data.
2 Press RINFO repeatedly to select the desired
Radio Data System display mode.
Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program.
Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data
System program.
Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program.
Select “CT” to display the current time.
Note
In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a
maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the
umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with
the “_” (underscore).
MEMORY
P02:Empty
Preset number
C01:FM 92.50MHz
Preset station
Displaying the Radio Data System
information (Europe model only)
CTRTPTYPS
FrequencyDecoder
DFM
DiPod
GENTER
G /
IOPTION
IRETURN
KVOLUME +/
NNumeric keys
PMEMORY
PPRESET /
PTUNING /
RINFO
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
N
MEMORY
P
INFO
R
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
HDMI 4 iPod
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
D
FM
MUTE
K
27 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION SETTINGS APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES
Playback
Playback mode
FM tuning
Playing back iPod™
Useful features
By using the Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX-
50TX/PDX-50BC), you can use the iPod/iPhone as a
remote control and enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone on
this unit. About PDX-50TX/PDX-50BC, refer to “Safety
and Accessory Information” (separate booklet).
See also: “iPod Interlock” (page 36)
y
This unit supports the following iPod/iPhone models.
iPod 5th generation
–iPod classic
iPod touch
iPod nano
iPhone
iPhone 3G
Notes
Be sure to use the product only in the country in where it was
purchased.
This unit does not support iPod (4th generation or before), iPod
without Dock connector, iPod photo and iPod mini.
You cannot run the AUTO SETUP while playing back the iPod/
iPhone by using PDX-50TX. To run the AUTO SETUP, stop
playback and then disconnect the iPod/iPhone from PDX-50TX.
Connect your iPod/iPhone and PDX-50TX, and
then start playback.
y
When you start playback of your iPod/iPhone, this unit
automatically operates as follows.
When this unit is on, this unit selects “iPod” as the input
source.
When this unit is in the standby mode, this unit turns on
and selects “iPod” as the input source.
You can also select the input source with DiPod.
To adjust the volume level, use the volume control on the
iPod/iPhone or KVOLUME +/– on this unit.
This unit automatically turns to the standby mode in the
following conditions.
The iPod/iPhone is disconnected from PDX-50TX.
The iPod/iPhone is turned into sleep mode.
Program type Descriptions
News
News
Current Affairs
Current Affairs
Information
Information
Sport
Sport
Education
Education
Drama
Drama
Cultures
Cultures
Science
Science
Varied Speech
Varied Speech
Pop Music
Pop Music
Rock Music
Rock Music
Easy Listening
Easy Listening Music
Light Classics
Light Classical Music
Serious Classic
Serious Classical Music
Other Music
Other Music
Playing back iPod™/iPhone™
INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC
MENU
28 En
This function adjusts the volume level of the TV so that it
will not increase suddenly when whenever the contents
being broadcast change (due to commercials, etc.).
Press MUNIVOLUME.
The UNIVOLUME indicator lights up on the front panel
display.
y
To turn off the UniVolume function, press MUNIVOLUME
again.
We recommend turning off the UniVolume function during
playback of music.
You can operate the following functions of this unit with
the remote control of your TV when the TV (HDMI
control function supported) is connected to the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit.
Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with
TV)
Adjusting the volume
Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or
TV)
y
Even if your TV supports the HDMI control function, some
functions may not be available. For details, refer to the manual
supplied with your TV.
If you connect this unit and Blu-ray disc player or DVD player
(HDMI control function supported) with HDMI, you can also
control those devices with the HDMI control function. For
details, refer to the manual supplied with each device.
We suggest that you use products (TV, Blu-ray disc/DVD
player, etc.) from the same manufacturer.
The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic
VIERA Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray
disc player.
To use this function, you need to set HDMI control
function and register the HDMI components to the TV.
y
For some HDMI components, you only need to set the HDMI
control function. Registering HDMI components to TV is not
required in this case.
Setting the HDMI control function
1 Turn on all devices connected to this unit
with HDMI.
2 Enable the HDMI control function on each
device.
For this unit, set “HDMI CONTROL” to “ON”
(page 36).
For external devices, refer to the manual supplied
with each device.
3 Turn off the TV and then turn on it again.
Registering HDMI components to TV
1 Select this unit as the input source of the TV.
2 Turn on the HDMI control device (Blu-ray disc
or DVD player) connected to this unit.
3 Select the HDMI control device (Blu-ray disc
or DVD player) as the input source of this unit
to check the video input.
Note
<Note>
In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the
followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV
may be effective.
“HDMI CONTROL” is set to “ON” on this unit (page 36).
The HDMI control function is enables on the TV.
If you changed the connection method or connected components,
repeat steps 1-3.
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a specified period of time.
1 Press QSLEEP repeatedly to set the interval
for the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator (page 7) flashes in the front
panel display while switching the interval for the
sleep timer.
2 Wait for a few seconds without operating this
unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated.
y
If this unit is set to the standby mode, the sleep timer
setting is canceled.
You can configure various settings for each input source
(TV, AUX1/2, HDMI1-4, iPod, and FM). Available menu
items vary depending on the selected input source.
1 Press DInput selector keys to select the
desired input source.
2 Press IOPTION.
The first item of the option menu for the selected
input source appears on the front panel display.
Useful features
Adjusting volume level
automatically (UniVolume)
Using the HDMI™ control function
Using the sleep timer
Configuring settings for each input
source (Option menu)
Sleep 120 min.
Sleep 90 min.
Sleep 60 min.
Sleep 30 min.
Sleep Off
1.Volume
Trim
DInput selector keys
GENTER
G /
G /
IOPTION
MUNIVOLUME
QSLEEP
RINFO
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
SLEEP
Q
INFO
R
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
HDMI 4 iPod
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
D
FM
M
29 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION SETTINGS APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES
Playback
Playback mode
FM tuning
Playing back iPod™
Useful features
3 Press G / to select the desired menu
item and then press GENTER.
4 Press G / to select the desired setting
and then press GENTER.
5 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION.
Option menu items
The following menu items are provided for each input
source.
Details of the menu items are as follows. The
configuration will be reflected to the input source
currently selected.
y
The initial settings are marked with “*”.
Volume Trim (Volume trim)
Use to reduce any change in volume when switching input
sources by correcting volume differences between input
sources.
Adjustable range: –6.0dB to +6.0dB (in 0.5 dB steps)
Initial setting: 0.0dB
Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
Use to select DTS digital audio signals for reproduction.
Choices: Auto*, DTS
Select Auto to automatically select audio input signals.
Select DTS to selects DTS signals only. Other input
signals are not reproduced.
FM Mode (FM receiving mode)
Use to set the FM broadcasting receiving mode.
Choices: Stereo*, Mono
Select Stereo to receive in stereo mode by priority.
Select Mono to receive in monaural mode.
Auto Preset (Automatic preset)
Use to automatically detect FM radio stations and registers
them as preset stations (page 25).
Clear Preset (Clear preset station)
Use to clear the preset FM stations (page 26).
Use to display information of the sampling frequency,
video signal type, and resolution for each input source on
the front panel display.
1 Select an input source (TV, AUX1/2, and
HDMI1-4) and then press RINFO.
2 Press RINFO repeatedly to change items to
be displayed.
Sampling frequency (Audio Sampling)
The sampling frequency per second in analog- to-digital
conversion.
Video signal (Video Signal In)
Signal type and resolution of video input signal.
Input
source
Menu items
HDMI1~4 Volume
Trim
Decoder
Mode
TV Volume
Trim
Decoder
Mode
AUX1~2 Volume
Trim
Decoder
Mode
FM Volume
Trim
FM
Mode
Auto
Preset
Clear
Preset
iPod Volume
Trim
Displaying the input signal
information
Audio Sampling
30 En
SETTINGS
You can manually configure various settings for this unit in “SET MENU”.
Customizing this unit (SET MENU)
SET MENU items
Menu Sub menu Features Page
MEMORY LOAD Loads the beam and sound settings saved in the
memory.
19
SAVE Saves the current beam and sound settings to the
memory.
19
AUTO SETUP BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ Optimizes the beam and sound settings
automatically.
16
BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY Optimizes the beam settings automatically. 16
SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY Optimizes the sound settings automatically. 16
MANUAL SETUP SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position
settings.
31
BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings. 32
IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front right and left
channels.
32
SOUND SET MENU TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-
frequency sound.
33
SUBWOOFER SET Configures the subwoofer settings. 33
AUDIO DELAY Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals
and audio signals.
33
DRC:Dynamic Range Control Adjusts the dynamic range. 34
BASS EXTENSION Selects the bass sound extension. 34
MUSIC ENHANCER Selects the compressed audio enhancer. 34
CHANNEL LEVEL Adjusts the volume of each channel. 34
SOUND OUT MENU SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG Configures the sound beam output settings. 34
SOUND OUT Configures the audio signal output settings. 34
INPUT MENU INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 35
INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source. 35
HDMI SETUP Configures the HDMI settings. 36
WIRELESS SETUP Configures the wireless settings. 36
DISPLAY MENU F. DISPLAY SETUP Configures the front panel display settings. 36
OSD SETUP Configures the OSD settings. 37
LANGUAGE SETUP Changes the language used in the OSD. 37
UNIT SETUP Changes the display unit of measurement. 37
DInput selector keys
GENTER
G / / /
G /
G
ISETUP
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
HDMI 4 iPod
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
D
FM
31 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Customizing this unit
(SET MENU)
System
configurations
(ADVANCED SETUP)
Using an external
amplifier
Controlling external
components
1 Press ISETUP.
2 Press G / to select the desired menu
and then press GENTER.
y
To return to the previous menu, press IRETURN.
3 Press G / / / and GENTER to
configure each parameter.
y
The initial settings are marked with “*”.
Note
The menu screen disappears if one of the DInput selector
keys is pressed while the SET MENU is being configured.
4 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP.
Use this menu to manually adjust the parameters related to
the sound beam output. To fine-adjust parameters
configured by AUTO SETUP, use “BEAM
ADJUSTMENT” and “IMAGE LOCATION”.
SETTING PARAMETERS (Setting
parameters)
SET MENU MANUAL SETUP SETTING
PARAMETERS
Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room
and the distance of this unit from the listening position.
y
If you make adjustments in “SETTING PARAMETERS”, the
“BEAM ADJUSTMENT” parameters are automatically
adjusted.
Note
If you make adjustments in “SETTING PARAMETERS”, the
beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP
procedure will be lost.
1 In “SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3”, configure
“INSTALLED POSITION”.
Select the installed position of this unit.
Choices: FLAT TO WALL* (parallel to wall),
ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (angle to wall or
corner)
Note
If you change this setting, “BEAM MODE” setting
changes automatically (page 23).
2 Configure “INSTALLED HEIGHT”.
Specify the installed height of this unit.
Control range: 0.0 m to 3.0 m (0.0 ft to 10.0 ft)
Initial setting: 1.0 m (3.5 ft)
y
•Press G to proceed to the next page.
3 In “SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3”, configure
the listening room settings.
Specify the length and width of the listening room.
Control range: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)
4 In “SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3”, configure
the distance settings.
Specify the distance between the listening position
and this unit. When this unit is installed parallel to
wall, you also need to specify the distance between
the listening position and left wall.
Basic SET MENU operation
MANUAL SETUP
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;SOUND SET MENU
;SOUND OUT MENU
;INPUT MENU
;DISPLAY MENU
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
1)SETTING PARAMETERS
2)BEAM ADJUSTMENT
3)IMAGE LOCATION
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
C)MANUAL SETUP
p
p
.
FLAT TO WALL
ANGLE TO WALL OR
CORNER
0.0 to 3.0 m
(0.0 ft to 10.0 ft)
When this unit is
installed parallel to wall,
specify the width of the
listening room and the
distance between this
unit and rear wall.
When this unit is
installed at the corner of
the room, specify the
width of length of the
listening room.
32 En
Control range (from this unit): 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft
to 30.0 ft)
Control range (from left wall): 0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft
to 38.0 ft)
BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment)
SET MENU MANUAL SETUP BEAM
ADJUSTMENT
Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings.
Notes
The “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” parameters are automatically
adjusted (except “Center” in “FOCAL LENGTH”) if you run
the AUTO SETUP (page 15) or if you configure “SETTING
PARAMETERS” (page 31).
Depending on the beam mode settings (page 23), some channel
positions may not be available for selection. In this case, “– –”
is displayed.
If you change “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” settings while playing
back your iPod/iPhone connected to PDX-50TX, the subwoofer
connected to SWK-W10 outputs the iPod/iPhone audio. We
recommend stopping the iPod/iPhone playback during the beam
adjustment.
1 Configure “HORIZONTAL ANGLE”.
Adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each
channel using test tones.
Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the
output to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move
it to the right.
Control range: L90° to R90°
y
Press G to switch the channels.
2 Configure “VERTICAL ANGLE”.
Adjust the vertical angle of sound beams for each
channel using test tones.
Adjust toward – (minus) to move the angle downward
and adjust toward + (plus) to move the angle upward.
Control range: –45° to +45°
3 Configure “BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH”.
Adjust the distance that sound beams travel after
being output and reflected off the wall until they
arrive at the listening position so that all sounds can
arrive at the listening position at the same time.
Note
Configure this setting only when you have adjusted
“HORIZONTAL ANGLE”.
Control range: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)
4 Configure “FOCAL LENGTH”.
Adjust the distance from the front of this unit to the
focal point of output for each channel to achieve an
expansive feeling for each channel. Adjust toward -
(minus) to move the focus outward (widen the sweet
spot) and adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus
toward the normal position (narrow the sweet spot).
Control range: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft)
y
We recommend that you use the initial setting (0.5 m or
1.5 ft) for “Center”.
The width of the sweet spot becomes slightly wider than
the width of this unit if you run the AUTO SETUP
(page 15) or if you configure “SETTING
PARAMETERS” (page 31).
IMAGE LOCATION (Image location)
SET MENU MANUAL SETUP IMAGE
LOCATION
Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and
right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be
heard closer to the center channel.
Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound
coming from the front left and right channels seems
unnatural.
1.8 to 9.0 m
(6.0 to 30.0 ft)
FLAT TO WALL
0.6 to 11.4 m
(2.0 to 38.0 ft)
(–)
(+)
(+)
(–)
(+)
(–)
The length of each
arrow indicates the
beam travel length.
Focal
length
Focal
point
Sweet
spot
Example
Front left channel Center channel
G
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
ENTER
G
33 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Customizing this unit
(SET MENU)
System
configurations
(ADVANCED SETUP)
Using an external
amplifier
Controlling external
components
You can adjust this parameter only when “5Beam Plus2”,
“5 Beam” or “3 Beam” is selected in “BEAM MODE”
(page 23).
y
To adjust the volume of each channel, see “CHANNEL
LEVEL” (page 34)
Choices: OFF*, ON
Select “ON” to configure the sound direction.
1 Adjust the image location for the front left
channel (LEFT).
The higher the percentage, the louder the output from
the center
2 Adjust the image location for the front right
channel (RIGHT).
The higher the percentage, the louder the output from
the center
TONE CONTROL (Tone control)
SET MENU SOUND SET MENU TONE
CONTROL
Use to adjust the tonal quality of sound beams.
TREBLE (Treble)
Use to adjust the high-frequency response.
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
BASS (Bass)
Use to adjust the low-frequency response.
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings)
SET MENU SOUND SET MENU
SUBWOOFER SET
Use to configure the subwoofer settings.
BASS OUT (Bass out)
Select where to output low-frequency effect (LFE) and
low-frequency (bass) signals.
Choices: SUBWOOFER, FRONT OR AUTO*
Select SUBWOOFER if you connect a subwoofer with
a subwoofer cable. LFE and low-frequency signals
from other channels are directed to the subwoofer.
Select FRONT OR AUTO if you do not use a
subwoofer or connect a subwoofer by wireless. LFE
and low-frequency signals from other channels are
directed to the front right and left channels when you
do not use a subwoofer. They are directed to the
subwoofer automatically when a wireless connection
between a subwoofer and this unit is established
properly. If the wireless connection is cut off, they are
directed to the front channels automatically.
CROSS OVER (Crossover)
When “BASS OUT” is set to “SUBWOOFER”, you can
use this feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for
all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position.
Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz*
LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level)
Adjust the output level of the low-frequency effect (LFE)
channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer. This
setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby
Digital or DTS signals.
Choices: –20 dB to 0 dB*
DISTANCE (Distance)
Adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the listening
position.
Choices: 0.3 m to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay)
SET MENU SOUND SET MENU AUDIO
DELAY
Use to adjust delay in output timing between video signals
and audio signals.
AUTO LIP SYNC (Automatic lipsync)
Select whether to automatically adjust the audio output
delay when a TV that supports the automatic lipsync is
connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
Choices: ON*, OFF
Select ON if the TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack
of this unit supports the automatic lipsync. The audio
output delay is automatically adjusted.
Select OFF if the TV connected to the HDMI OUT
jack of this unit does not support the automatic lipsync
or you want to disable the automatic lipsync. You can
manually adjust the audio output delay in “HDMI”.
TV
Adjust the audio output delay applied to signals input
from the TV jacks.
Control range: 0 msec* to 400 msec
HDMI
Manually adjust the audio output delay applied to signals
input from the HDMI IN jacks. This setting is effective
only when “AUTO LIP SYNC” is set to “OFF”
Control range: 0 msec to 400 msec
Initial setting: 30msec
AUX1/2
Adjust the audio output delay applied to signals input
from the AUX1/2 jacks.
Control range: 0 msec to 400 msec
Initial setting: 30msec
SOUND SET MENU
Without adjustment
With the front left
channel adjusted
Without adjustment
With the front right
channel adjusted
34 En
DRC:Dynamic Range Control
(Dynamic range control)
SET MENU SOUND SET MENU
DRC:Dynamic Range Control
Use to adjust the dynamic range compression. Dynamic
range is the difference between the smallest sound that can
be heard above the noise of the equipment and the biggest
sound that can be heard without distortion.
Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control)
Select whether to automatically adjust the dynamic range
in conjunction with the volume level. When this function
is enabled, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.
When the volume level is low: Narrow the dynamic range.
Loud sound is played back softer, and soft sound which is
hard to be listened to is played back louder.
When the volume level is high: Widen the dynamic range.
From soft sound to loud sound, source sound is played
back without adjusting volume.
Choices: On*, Off
Select On to enable the adaptive dynamic range
control.
Select Off to disable the adaptive dynamic range
control.
y
“Dolby/DTS DRC” is automatically set to “Max” when
“Off” is selected.
This setting is automatically set to “Off” when the
UniVolume function is turned on while this setting is
automatically set to “On” when the UniVolume
function is turned off.
Dolby/DTS DRC (Dynamic range of Dolby Digital
and DTS signals)
Select the amount of dynamic range applied when this unit
is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals
Choices: Max* (Maximum), Standard, Min/Auto
(Minimum/Auto)
Select Max to output sound without adjusting the
dynamic range of the input signals.
Select Standard to set the standard dynamic range
recommended for regular home use.
Select Min/Auto to set the dynamic range suitable for
low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night,
for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals
(Min) or adjust the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD
signals based on input signal information (Auto).
y
Adaptive DRC” is automatically set to “Off” when the
settings other than “Max” is selected.
BASS EXTENSION (Bass extension)
SET MENU SOUND SET MENU BASS
EXTENSION
Use to turn on or off the bass sound extension. When this
function is enabled, the BASS EXT indicator lights up on
the front panel display (page 7).
Choices: OFF, MID*, DEEP
Select OFF to output bass sounds without change.
Select MID to output moderately-enhanced bass
sounds.
Select DEEP to output deep bass sounds.
MUSIC ENHANCER (Music Enhancer)
SET MENU SOUND SET MENU MUSIC
ENHANCER
Use to turn on or off the compressed audio enhancer.
When this function is enabled, the ENHANCER indicator
lights up on the front panel display (page 7).
AUX1/2
Select whether to apply the compressed audio enhancer
for playback of AUX1/2 input sources.
Choices: ON, OFF*
Select ON to enable the compressed audio enhancer for
playback of AUX1/2 input sources.
Select OFF to disable the compressed audio enhancer
for playback of AUX1/2 input sources.
iPod
Select whether to apply the compressed audio enhancer to
iPod/iPhone playback.
Choices: ON*, OFF
Select ON to enable the compressed audio enhancer for
iPod/iPhone playback.
Select OFF to disable the compressed audio enhancer
for iPod/iPhone playback.
CHANNEL LEVEL (Channel level)
SET MENU SOUND SET MENU CHANNEL
LEVEL
Use to adjust the volume of each channel with test tones.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Note
Adjustable channels vary depending on the “CHANNEL OUT”
setting.
“Surround Back R” and “Surround Back L” are not adjustable
when “SOUND OUT” is set to “SPEAKER”.
SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG (Sound
beam output configuration)
SET MENU SOUND OUT MENU SOUND
BEAM OUT CONFIG
Use to configure the number of output channels or audio
output method. For details, see “Changing the audio
output method for surround playback” (page 23).
SOUND OUT (Sound output)
SET MENU SOUND OUT MENU SOUND OUT
Use to configure the audio signal output settings.
Volume : highVolume : low
Input levelInput level
Output level
Output level
On
Off Off
On
SOUND OUT MENU
G /
G
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
ENTER
G
35 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Customizing this unit
(SET MENU)
System
configurations
(ADVANCED SETUP)
Using an external
amplifier
Controlling external
components
SOUND OUT (Sound output redirection)
Use to redirect the output of audio signals. Audio output
of all the channels switches simultaneously.
Choices: SPEAKER*, PRE OUT
Select SPEAKER to output sounds from this unit.
Select PRE OUT to output audio signals from the PRE
OUT jacks of this unit. You also need to configure the
parameters from “BASS OUT” to “LFE Level”
described below.
y
The parameters from “BASS OUT” to “LFE Level” are settings
for the PRE OUT jacks when they are selected as audio output
jacks.
BASS OUT (Bass sound output redirection)
Use to redirect the output of bass sounds. The settings
under “BASS OUT” are for the PRE OUT jacks.
Choices: SUBWOOFER, FRONT*
Select SUBWOOFER to output bass sounds from the
subwoofer.
Select FRONT to output bass sounds from the external
front right and left speakers.
Front SP Size (Front speaker size for PRE OUT)
Select the size of external front speakers.
Choices: Small, Large*
Select Small if the diameter of the front speaker’s
woofer is smaller than 16 cm. Low-frequency parts of
front right and left channel signals are output from the
subwoofer.
Center SP Size (Center speaker size for PRE
OUT)
Select the size of external center speakers.
Choices: None, Small*
Select None if no center speaker is used. Center
channel signals are mixed into the front right and left
speakers.
Select Small if a center speaker is used. Low-frequency
parts of center channel signals are output from the
subwoofer (or mixed into the front right and left
channel signals if subwoofer is not available).
PRE OUT Volume (PRE OUT volume)
Adjust the output level of the PRE OUT jacks.
Control range: –30.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –18.0 dB
LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level for PRE
OUT)
Adjust the low-frequency effect output level of the PRE
OUT jacks. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 dB to + 0 dB*
INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment)
SET MENU INPUT MENU INPUT
ASSIGNMENT
Use to change the key assignments of input jacks on this
unit. The parenthetic references displayed in the menu
screen indicate the initial settings.
See also: “AUDIO SELECT” (page 36)
y
Press G to proceed to the next page.
AUDIO1
Select the key to which the AUDIO IN (TV) jacks are
assigned.
Choices: TV*, AUX1, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,
HDMI4
Note
The input already selected in “AUDIO2” is not displayed. To set
the input selected in “AUDIO2”, change “AUDIO2” parameter,
and then reconfigure.
AUDIO2
Select the key to which the AUDIO IN (AUX 1) jacks are
assigned.
Choices: AUX1*, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,
HDMI4, TV
Note
The input already selected in “AUDIO1” is not displayed. To set
the input selected in “AUDIO1”, change “AUDIO1” parameter,
and then reconfigure.
OPTICAL1
Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (TV) jack is
assigned.
Choices: TV*, AUX1, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,
HDMI4
Note
The input already selected in “OPTICAL2” or “COAX” is not
displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters,
change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure.
OPTICAL2
Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack is
assigned.
Choices: AUX1*, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,
HDMI4, TV
Note
The input already selected in “OPTICAL1” or “COAX” is not
displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters,
change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure.
COAX
Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (AUX 2) jack is
assigned.
Choices: AUX2*, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, TV,
AUX1
Note
The input already selected in “OPTICAL1” or “OPTICAL2” is
not displayed. To set the input selected in one of these
parameters, change the corresponding parameter, and then
reconfigure.
INPUT RENAME (Input rename)
SET MENU INPUT MENU INPUT RENAME
Use to change the name of the input source displayed
when the input source is selected. Select a name from
templates, or enter an original name.
Selecting a name from templates
1 Press G / to select the input source to
be renamed.
INPUT MENU
36 En
2 Press G / to select a input source name.
Choices: TV, Blu-ray, DVD, HDDVD, STB, Satelite,
Game
3 To exit from the menu, press IRETURN.
Entering an original name
1 Press G / to select the input source to
be renamed.
2 Press GENTER.
” appears above the new name display to indicate
the position to be entered.
3 Press G / to place the _ (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
4 Press G / to select the desired
character.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit other characters.
6 To complete the setting, press GENTER.
7 To exit from the menu, press IRETURN.
y
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, and symbols (!, ?, <, >, etc.) are available
for input.
HDMI SETUP (HDMI setup)
SET MENU INPUT MENU HDMI SETUP
Use to configure the settings related to HDMI signals and
HDMI control function.
SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio)
Use to select a component to play back HDMI audio
signals. This setting is effective only when “HDMI
CONTROL” is set to “OFF”.
y
HDMI video signals input to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this
unit are always output from the HDMI OUT jack.
Choices: (Model name of this unit)*, OTHER
Select this unit to play back HDMI audio signals on
this unit.
Select OTHER to play back HDMI audio signals on the
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
AUDIO SELECT (Audio select)
Select whether or not to output HDMI audio signals input
to each HDMI IN jacks. This function is useful when you
want to enjoy another audio input source while watching
HDMI video sources. For example, if you set “HDMI1” of
AUDIO SELECT” to “OFF” and “OPTICAL1” of
“INPUT ASSIGNMENT” to “HDMI1” (page 35), you
can enjoy the audio source input to the DIGITAL IN
(AUX 1) jack while watching the HDMI video source
input to HDMI IN 1 jack.
Choices: OFF, ON*
HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control)
Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI control-
compatible TV via HDMI. For details, see “Using the
HDMI control function” (page 28).
Choices: OFF*, ON
Select OFF to turn off the HDMI control function. The
standby consumption power of this unit decreases.
Select ON to turn off the HDMI control function.
WIRELESS SETUP (Wireless setup)
SET MENU INPUT MENU WIRELESS SETUP
Use to configure the wireless connection between this unit
and PDX-50TX or SWK-W10.
Wireless Function (Wireless function)
Select whether or not to use the wireless function of this
unit.
Choices: No, Yes*
Select No to disable the wireless function of this unit.
Select Yes to enable the wireless function of this unit.
iPod Interlock (iPod interlock)
Select whether or not to use the iPod/iPhone interlock
function. When the iPod/iPhone interlock function is on,
this unit automatically turns on if you turn on the iPod/
iPhone when this unit is in the standby mode. In addition,
this unit is set to the standby mode if the iPod/iPhone is set
to the standby mode.
Choices: OFF, ON*
Select OFF to disable the iPod/iPhone interlock
function. The standby consumption power of this unit
decreases.
Select ON to enable the iPod/iPhone interlock
function.
Group ID (Group ID)
The group ID is used for wirelessly connecting Yamaha
products that support AirWired. To establish a connection
among this unit, PDX-50TX and SWK-W10, set the group
ID of these products to the same group.
Choices: A1*, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3
y
PDX-50TX supports “1” (A1), “2” (A2), and “3” (A3) only.
F.DISPLAY SETUP (Front panel display
setup)
SET MENU DISPLAY MENU F.DISPLAY
SETUP
Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the
front panel display.
STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer)
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display
when you operate this unit.
Choices: –2, –1, OFF*
AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer)
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display
when you do not operate this unit. The front panel display
automatically dims or turns off according to this setting if
no operation is performed for a specified period of time.
Choices: DISPLAY OFF, –3 to –1, OFF*
Select OFF for the same brightness as “STANDARD
DIMMER”.
Select –3 to –1 to get dimmer (based on “STANDARD
DIMMER”).
Select DISPLAY OFF to turn off the front panel
display.
DISPLAY MENU
CPower
GENTER
G /
G /
IRETURN
ISETUP
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
C
37 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Customizing this unit
(SET MENU)
System
configurations
(ADVANCED SETUP)
Using an external
amplifier
Controlling external
components
OSD SETUP (OSD setup)
SET MENU DISPLAY MENU OSD SETUP
Use to adjust the display position and select the
background color of the OSD.
OSD SHIFT (OSD shift)
Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust
toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the
OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it.
Choices: –5 to +5
Initial setting: ±0
OSD BACK COLOR (OSD background color)
Use to select the background color of the OSD.
Choices: Blue*, Gray, Black, Purple, Red
LANGUAGE SETUP (Language setup)
SET MENU DISPLAY MENU LANGUAGE
SETUP
Use to select the language used in the OSD.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),
Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish),
ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch),
Русский (Russian)
Initial setting: ENGLISH (English)
UNIT SETUP (Unit setup)
SET MENU DISPLAY MENU UNIT SETUP
Use this to change the display unit of measurement.
Choices: METERS*, FEET
Select METERS to enter distances in meters.
Select FEET to enter distances in feet.
Note
If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may
change.
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to
adjust and customize the way this unit operates.
1 Press CPower p key to set this unit to the
standby mode.
2 While holding down INPUT on the front
panel, press CPower p key on the remote
control.
Keep holding down INPUT until “ADVANCED
SETUP” appears on the front panel display.
3 Press ISETUP.
4 Press G / to select the desired menu
and then press GENTER.
y
To return to the previous screen, press IRETURN.
5 Press G / to select the desired
parameter.
6 Press CPower p key to set this unit to the
standby mode.
The new setting will be reflected when you turn on
this unit next time.
y
The initial settings are marked with “*”.
TURN ON VOLUME (Volume level at power-on)
Set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is
turned on.
Control range: OFF*, 01 to 99, MAX (Maximum)
MAX VOLUME SET (Maximum volume setting)
Set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not
output sound beyond the limited volume level.
Control range: 01 to 99, MAX* (Maximum)
PANEL INP.KEY (Front panel input key)
Select whether or not to enable the INPUT key on front
panel key. To disable the operations, select “P.INPUT:
OFF”.
Choices: P.INPUT: ON*, P.INPUT: OFF
F.PANEL KEY (Front panel key)
Select whether or not to enable front panel key operations
(except ADVANCED SETUP operations). To disable the
operations, select “F.PANEL: OFF”.
Choices: F.PANEL: ON*, F.PANEL: OFF
System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP)
INPUT VOLU ME INTELLIBEAM MIC
INPUT
VOL
DEMOX MODE
Example (when “DEMO MODE” is selected)
38 En
R.INPUT POWER (Power-on by remote control
input keys)
Select whether or not to automatically turn on this unit
when you select an input source on the remote control. To
enable the function, select “R.INPUT PW: ON”.
Choices: R.INPUT PW: OFF*, R.INPUT PW: ON
AC ON STANDBY (Standby after AC on)
Set this unit to the standby mode when the AC power is
recovered after the power to this unit was lost temporally
(disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet, power
outage, etc.). To enable the function, select “AC
STANDBY: ON”.
Choices: AC STANDBY: OFF*, AC STANDBY: ON
MEMORY PROTECT (Memory protect)
Protect the settings you have saved in the system memory.
To protect the settings, select “PROTECT: ON”.
Choices: PROTECT: OFF*, PROTECT: ON
DEMO MODE (Demo mode)
Test the sound beam output from this unit to experience
the sound beam. To set this unit to the demo mode, select
“BEAM DEMO: ON”.
Choices: BEAM DEMO: OFF*, BEAM DEMO: ON
To move the beam horizontally, turn off this unit and
then turn on it again (“DEMO” appears on the front
panel display). Playback an input source and then press
EOFF.
To stop the beam movement, press EOFF again.
To adjust the beam angle manually, press
FSURROUND or FSTEREO when the beam is not
moving.
y
After you checked the sound beam output, set this setting to
“BEAM DEMO: OFF”.
If you set “SOUND OUT” to “PRE OUT”, “DEMO MODE”
does not function.
FACTORY PRESET (Factory preset)
Reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory
presets.
Choices: CANCEL*, RESET
You can connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Set “SOUND OUT” (page 34) to “PRE OUT” and then
configure “PRE OUT BASS Management” parameters.
See also: “Changing the audio output method for surround playback” (page 23)
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Output front right and left channel signals.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Output surround right and left channel signals.
3 SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks
Output surround back right and left channel signals.
4 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Outputs center channel signals.
5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
Note
The following functions are disabled when an external amplifier
is used.
AUTO SETUP (page 15)
CINEMA DSP programs (page 22)
UniVolume (page 28)
MUSIC ENHANCER (page 34)
BASS EXTENSION (page 34)
Adaptive DRC (page 34)
Using an external amplifier
FRONT
PRE OUT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
5
1234
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
HDMI 4 iPod FM
ENTER
SURROUND STEREO
OFF
ENTER
TAINMENT
MUSIC
CINEMA DSP
MOVIE
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
TV AV
MENUTOP MENU
OPTION
TV
MUTE
CODE SET
UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM
TV
INPUT MUTE
TV VOL CH VOLUME
SETUP RETURN
MEMORY
SLEEPINFO
TUNING PRESET
A
TV AV
B
E
F
HDMI 4 iPod
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
TV AUX 1 AUX 2
D
FM
OPTION SETUP RETURN
I
ENTER
G
MENUTOP MENU
H
J
MUTE INPUT
L
0 +10
ENT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
N
O
MEMORY
P
ATransmission
indicator
BAV
BTV
DInput selector keys
EOFF
FSTEREO
FSURROUND
GCursor ( / / /
) keys
GENTER
HMENU
HTOP MENU
IRETURN
ISETUP
JCH /
LTV operation keys
NNumeric keys
OCODE SET
PExternal component
operation keys
39 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Customizing this unit
(SET MENU)
System
configurations
(ADVANCED SETUP)
Using an external
amplifier
Controlling external
components
Note
Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if
a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control.
You can control external components using the following
keys on the remote control of this unit by setting the
appropriate remote control codes (page 45). Before
operating the control keys, press one of the DInput
selector keys to select an external component to be
controlled.
B TV p
Turns on the power of your TV or set it to the standby
mode.
B AV p
Turns on the power of the selected component or set it to
the standby mode.
G Cursor ( / / / ) keys, ENTER
Use to select menu items.
H TOP MENU
Displays the top menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD.
H MENU
Displays the menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD.
I RETURN
Returns to the previous menu screen.
J CH /
Switches between available channels for your external
component.
L TV operation keys
TV VOL +/
Adjusts the audio output level of your TV.
TV MUTE
Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV.
TV INPUT
Switched the input source for your TV.
N Numeric keys
Use to enter numeric digits or specify a channel number.
O CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external component
operations (page 39).
P External component operation keys
Use to control playback of your external component.
y
•The BTVp and LTV operation keys always work regardless
of the selected input source.
Notes
Depending on external components, some or all operations may
not work. In this case, operate the component using the supplied
remote control.
If you operate your TV with the remote control of this unit
when the HDMI control function is activated, this unit or
external component connected to this unit with HDMI works
improperly in some cases.
Setting remote control codes
1 While holding down OCODE SET, press
DInput selector key to which the remote
control code is assigned.
ATransmission indicator flashes twice.
2 Release OCODE SET.
3 Press NNumeric keys to enter the remote
control code (page 45) for your external
component.
Each time you press you press the key,
ATransmission indicator flashes once. Once the 5-
digit remote control code is entered properly,
ATransmission indicator lights up for approximately
2 seconds.
y
To clear remote control code set to a selected input source,
enter “00010”.
Note
If any key other than NNumeric keys is pressed,
ATransmission indicator flashes 5 times and the setting
mode is canceled.
4 Perform a test operation using the remote
control of this unit.
If the external component functions correctly, the
remote control code setup is successful. If it does not
function correctly, the remote control code may be
incorrect. Check the remote control code for your
external component (page 45) and try again.
Note
If no operation is performed after step 1 or in the middle of
step 2 within 30 seconds, ATransmission indicator
flashes 5 times and the setting mode is canceled.
Resetting all remote control codes
1 While holding down OCODE SET, press
ISETUP.
ATransmission indicator flashes twice.
2 Release OCODE SET.
3 Press NNumeric keys to enter “99999”.
Each time you press the NNumeric keys,
ATransmission indicator flashes once. Once the
remote control code is entered properly,
ATransmission indicator lights up for approximately
2 seconds and then the initialization is completed.
Note
If one of the other keys is pressed, ATransmission
indicator flashes 5 times and the initialization is canceled.
Controlling external components
40 En
APPENDIX
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction
below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer
or service center.
General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit does not operate
properly.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an
external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive
static electricity) or by a power supply with low
voltage.
Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the
outlet and plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
12
This unit fails to turn on when
CPower (p) key is pressed, or
enters the standby mode soon
after the power has been turned
on.
The AC power supply cable is not firmly connected to
the AC wall outlet.
Connect the AC power supply cable firmly to the AC
wall outlet.
12
This unit has been exposed to a strong external
electric shock (such as lightning and strong static
electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC
power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds,
and use it normally.
12
This unit suddenly enters the
standby mode.
The internal temperature becomes too high and the
overheat protection circuitry has been activated.
Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool down and
turn it back on.
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. 21
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
12
No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or
DInput selector keys.
21
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 21
The sound is muted. Press KMUTE or KVOLUME +/– to resume audio
output and adjust the volume level.
21
The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM
signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling
frequency) are being received from the source
component.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
Change the system settings of the source component.
The HDMI components connected to this unit do not
support the HDCP copy protection standards.
Connect the HDMI components that support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
12
“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and HDMI
audio signals are not being played back on this unit.
Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to this unit in “SET
MENU”.
36
No sound or too small sound from
a specific channel
The output level of the channel is muted. Raise the output level of the channel.
34
The beam setting is inappropriate. Adjust the beam setting.
32
You play back the source in the stereo mode. Start surround playback. 22
Some audio output methods do not output sound
beams for certain channels.
Select another beam mode.
23
No sound from the subwoofer. “BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT OR AUTO” in
“SUBWOOFER SET”.
Set “BASS OUT” to “SUBWOOFER” in
“SUBWOOFER SET”.
33
The source does not contain low bass signals.
No sound from the subwoofer
connected by wireless.
The group IDs of this unit and SWK-W10 are not set
to the same value.
Check whether the group IDs of this unit and SWK-
W10 are set to the same value.
36
“Wireless Function” is set to “No”. Set “Wireless Function” to “Yes”.
36
Distorted or too little bass sound. “CROSS OVER” is set incorrectly in
“SUBWOOFER SET”.
Set “CROSS OVER” correctly in “SUBWOOFER
SET”.
33
Surround sound effects are
insubstantial.
The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped
room.
There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path
of the sound beam.
41 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
FM tuner
Remote control
Digital audio signals cannot be
played back. (q DIGITAL indicator
does not light up in the front panel
display.)
The playback component is connected to this unit
with an analog connection.
Connect them with an HDMI connection or a digital
connection.
12
The external component is not set to output digital
audio signals.
Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your
component and check the setting.
Bit streaming is disabled on the external component. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your
component and check the setting.
There is noise interference when a
subwoofer is not connected to this
unit.
The protection circuitry was in operation because a
source with strong bass elements was played back.
Turn down the volume level.
21
Set “BASS OUT” to “SUBWOOFER” in
“SUBWOOFER SET”.
33
Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for
“SUBWOOFER SET”.
33
On-screen display does not
appear.
The cable is not connected to the TV or this unit
properly.
Connect the cable properly.
12
The HDMI control function does
not work properly.
“HDMI CONTROL” is set to “OFF” in “SET
MENU”.
Set “HDMI CONTROL” to “ON” in “SET MENU”.
36
The HDMI control function is disabled on your TV. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your TV
and check the setting.
The number of the connected HDMI components is
over the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI components.
The automatic lipsync is not
effective even “AUTO LIP SYNC” is
set to “ON”.
The TV does not support the automatic lipsync. Set “AUTO LIP SYNC” to “OFF” and then manually
adjust the audio output delay.
33
“Not Available” appears on the
front panel display after key
operation.
The key is unable to function in the current condition.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may
cause this problem when the transmitter is too far
away or the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
14
Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
25
There is distortion, and clear
reception cannot be obtained even
with a good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path
interference.
The desired station cannot be
tuned into with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
25
Previously preset stations can no
longer be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again.
25
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control does not work
and/or function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
14
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of
fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control
sensor of this unit.
Reposition this unit.
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
14
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
42 En
iPod
Cannot operate external
components with the remote
control of this unit.
The external component you want to operate is not
selected as the input source.
Press the desired DInput selector key to select the
external component you want to operate.
39
The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another
code for the same manufacturer using the “List of
remote control codes”.
39
Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there
are some models that do not respond to the remote
control.
Use the remote control supplied with the external
component.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No sound. PDX-50TX is connected to another device. Select the same group ID as selected on this unit.
PDX-50TX and this unit are not connected since they
are set to different groups.
Set both PDX-50TX and this unit to the same group.
36
“Wireless Function” is set to “No”. Set “Wireless Function” to “Yes”.
36
Distance is too far. Move PDX-50TX closer to this unit.
There is a device (microwave oven, wireless LAN,
etc.) outputting signals in 2.4 GHz frequency band
nearby.
Move this unit away from the device. If the device is
IEEE802.11n-compliant, change the channel setting
of the device so as not to affect the unit.
The iPod or iPhone is not connected to PDX-50TX
firmly.
Connect the iPod or iPhone firmly.
The firmware of the iPod or iPhone is not updated. Download the latest iTunes software to update the
firmware of the iPod or iPhone.
The signal from PDX-50TX is blocked by your body
or metallic objects, etc.
Change the way of holding, orientation, or position of
PDX-50TX to avoid the object blocking the signal.
The battery of iPod or iPhone is low. Charge the iPod or iPhone.
The iPod or iPhone is in the process of connecting
with this unit.
Please wait for a while.
The protection circuitry has been activated by
excessive volume.
Turn down the volume.
21
Controlling volume on the iPod or
iPhone does not work.
The iPod or iPhone being used is not supported by
this unit.
Use an iPod or iPhone supported by this unit.
27
The iPod or iPhone is not connected to PDX-50TX
firmly.
Connect the iPod or iPhone firmly.
Suddenly this unit produces
sounds even though an iPod or
iPhone is not connected.
This unit is connected to another device. Change the group ID of this unit.
36
The iPod/iPhone interlock function
does not work.
“iPod Interlock” is set to “OFF”. Set “iPod Interlock” to “ON”.
36
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
43 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels
(left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital
provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the
system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel).
By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate
moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible
than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum
to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with excitement and realism previously unheard of.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-
channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-
channel sources.
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic
moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-
around” effects.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for
high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,
and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray
Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete
channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital
Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology
enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right
channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
(instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel
sources in addition to the Movie mode.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.
There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and
“Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to
reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right
channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a
surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround
channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser
discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro
Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing
system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected
as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,
offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8
discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-
channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with
all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to
the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD
video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is
now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world.
DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital
surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-
free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right, and center channels, 2
surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a
total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that
enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back
channel to existing 5.1-channel format.
DTS Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-
range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal
playback. Two modes are available: Music mode for playing music
sources and Cinema mode for movies.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including
Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96
kHz audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with
the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray
Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio
master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD
Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed
Glossary
44 En
for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-
supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing
an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV
receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television),
HDMI supports standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well
as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits
all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with
bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and
requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface
that meets the security requirements of content providers and system
operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website
at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
LFE 0.1-channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The
frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range
compared to the full-range reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in
Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded, and transmitted without using any compression.
This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM
system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the
analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors
that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color
space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is
particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.
AMP SECTION
Maximum Output Power
Woofer...........................................................20 W/ch (4 Ω, 100 Hz, 10% THD)
Small dia. speaker .............................................2 W/ch (4 Ω, 1 kHz, 10% THD)
SPEAKER SECTION
Speaker type.................................................. 2-way acoustic suspension magnetic
•Driver
Small dia. speakers.............. 4 cm (1-1/2 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 40
Woofers ....................................................................... 11 cm (4-1/2 in) cone × 2
Tweeters (YSP-5100 only) ................................2.5 cm (1 in) balanced dome x 2
Frequency response
YSP-5100 ............................................... 70 Hz to 20 kHz (-10dB, Stereo mode)
YSP-4100 ............................................... 80 Hz to 20 kHz (-10dB, Stereo mode)
CONNECTIONS
Input Jacks
TV, AUX 1 AUDIO IN............................................................... 2 pairs (Analog)
TV, AUX 1 DIGITAL IN
(FS=32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz)
...............................................................................................2 (Optical digital)
AUX 2 DIGITAL IN
(FS=32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz)
.............................................................................................. 1 (Coaxial digital)
AUX 1 VIDEO IN......................................................................... 1 (Composite)
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea, and General models] ....................................... NTSC
[Other models] ........................................................................................... PAL
AUX 2 VIDEO IN........................................................................ 1 (Component)
HDMI IN............................................................................................................ 4
Output Jacks
SUBWOOFER .................................................................................................. 1
VIDEO OUT (composite input or menu screen) ......................... 1 (Composite)
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea, and General models] ....................................... NTSC
[Other models] ........................................................................................... PAL
HDMI OUT ....................................................................................................... 1
System Connector Jack
INTELLIBEAM MIC ....................................................... 1 (Microphone input)
RS-232C .................................................................................1 (System control)
SYSTEM CONNECTOR .............................. 1 (for subwoofer power interlock)
IR IN ......................................................................................1 (System control)
IR-OUT ..................................................................................1 (System control)
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] .................................................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
Wireless
Frequency ...................................................................................................2.4 GHz
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ....................................................... AC 220240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Europe and Russia models] ...................................... AC 220240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Korea model] ............................................................ AC 220240 V, 50/60 Hz
[General model] ......................................................... AC 110120 V, 50/60 Hz
[China and Asia models] ............................................ AC 220240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption ....................................................................................... 55 W
Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control OFF/Wireless Power OFF ......................................0.5 W or less
HDMI Control ON/AirWired ON (factory preset).......................... 1.0 W or less
Dimensions (W x H x D)
YSP-5100
Maximum dimension.............1200 x 212 x 90 mm (47-1/4 x 8-3/8 x 3-1/2 in)
With stands ........................1200 x 214 x 110.7mm (47-1/4 x 8-3/8 x 4-3/8 in)
YSP-4100
Maximum dimension.............1030 x 212 x 90 mm (40-1/2 x 8-3/8 x 3-1/2 in)
With stands ........................1030 x 214 x 110.7mm (40-1/2 x 8-3/8 x 4-3/8 in)
Weight
YSP-5100 .................................................................................11.0 kg (24.2 lbs)
YSP-4100 .................................................................................10.0 kg (22.0 lbs)
*
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard:
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by
Digital Content Protection, LLC.
45 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION
TV
ACCENT 14801, 16201
ACCUPHASE 16201
ACTION 14701, 14801, 15401
ACURA 00101
ADDISON 01201, 01601, 08401
ADMIRAL 01301, 02201, 05801,
14701, 14801, 15001,
15201, 18601
ADVENT 09601
ADYSON 14701, 15401
AEA 15701, 16201
AGB 06801
AIKO 01201, 14801, 15701,
16201
AIM 15701, 16201
AIWA 16901, 17101, 17701,
18301
AKAI 00101, 00301, 02901,
04601, 06801, 08901,
10501, 14701, 14801,
15401, 15701, 16201,
16701
AKIBA 15701, 16201
AKITO 15701, 16201
AKURA 03701, 14701, 14801,
15701, 16201
ALBA 00101, 00401, 04801,
08501, 14701, 14801,
15701, 16201
ALFA 14701
ALLSTAR 14701, 15701, 16201
AMERICA ACTION
02701
AMPRO 09401
AMSTRAD 00101, 00401, 02501,
04801, 05101, 05301,
06801, 14801, 15001,
15701, 16201
ANAM 00101, 02701, 03401,
15701, 16201
ANAM NATIONAL
03401, 08301, 15701,
16201
ANGLO 14801
ANITECH 00101, 14701, 14801,
15401, 15701, 16201
ANSONIC 14801, 15701, 15901,
16201
AOC 00101, 00301, 00901,
01201, 01301, 01601,
02601, 02701, 05601,
14701, 15401, 16301,
16501, 17901
APEX DIGITAL
09301, 09701, 09901
AR SYSTEM 15701, 16201
ARC EN CIEL 16001
ARCAM 16001
ARDEM 15701, 16201
ARISTONA 14701, 15701, 16201
ART TECH 14701
ASA 01401
ASBERG 14701, 15701, 16201
ASORA 14801
ASTRA 14801, 15701, 16201
ATLANTIC 14701, 15701, 16201
ATORI 14801
ATORO 14801
AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701, 14701,
14801, 15701, 15901,
16201
AUDIOTON 14801
AUDIOVOX 14701
AUTOVOX 15501, 16101
AWA 00101, 14801, 15701,
15901, 16201
BAIRD 15801
BANG & OLUFSEN
07201
BASIC 00101
BASIC LINE 14701, 14801, 15701,
15901, 16201
BAUR 00401, 04601, 06701,
14701, 14801, 15701,
16101, 16201
BAYSONIC 02701
BEAUMARK 02601
BEC 14701
BECRESE 14701, 15401
BEKO 04701, 06201, 09001,
09101, 14701, 15701,
16201
BELCOR 16301
BELL & HOWELL
02001, 14701, 18401,
18601, 18701
BENCHMARK-BEAUMARK
14701, 14801, 15401
BEON 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
BESTAR 14701, 14801, 15701,
15901, 16201
BESTAR-DAEWOO
15901
BIGSTON 14801
BLACK DIAMOND
16201
BLAUPUNKT 02801
BLUE SKY 08501, 11401, 14701,
15701, 16201
BONDSTEC 03301, 15501
BPL 15701, 16201
BRADFORD 02701
BRANDT 01701, 04201, 15801,
16001
BRENDSTAR 14801
BRINKMANN 15701, 16201
BRIONVEGA 14701, 15001, 15701,
16201
BRIORRYEGA 14701
BROCKWOOD 15401
BROKSONIC 03101, 05801, 15401,
16801
BROKWOOD 16301
BUSH 00101, 00101, 00401,
04801, 04901, 08501,
11401, 14701, 15701,
15901, 16101, 16201
BYDESIGN 14301, 14401, 14501,
14601
CAMPLE 15401
CANDLE 00301, 15401, 16301,
17801, 17901
CAPEHART 14701, 15401
CARAD 15701, 16201
CARENA 15701, 16201
CARNIVALE 00301
CARREFOUR 14701, 15701, 16201
CARVER 00801, 02401, 14701
CASCADE 00101, 15701, 16201
CASIO 15701, 16101, 16201
CATHAY 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
CCE 00401, 15701, 16201
CELEBRITY 00001
CELERA 09701
CENTURION 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201, 17901
CGE 03301, 14801, 16001
CGM 14801
CHANGHONG 09701
CHING TAI 00101, 01201
CHUN YUN 00001, 00101, 01201,
02701
CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601, 02701
CIE 14801
CIMLINE 00101, 14801
CINERAL 01201, 05601
CIRCUIT CITY15401
CITIZEN 00301, 00901, 01201,
14701, 15401, 16301,
16701, 16801, 17801,
17901, 18101, 18201,
18601
CITY 14801
CLARION 02701
CLARIVOX 00401, 15701, 16201
CLATRONIC 03301, 04701, 14801,
15701, 16201
CLP CLASSIC 16301
COLORTYME 14701, 16301, 17901
COMPUTRON 14801
CONCERTO 16301, 17901
CONCORDE 14801
CONDOR 04101, 04701, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16201
CONIC 14701, 15401
CONRAC 10301
CONRAD 15701, 16201
CONTEC 00101, 02701, 14801,
15701, 16201, 18901
CONTINENTAL EDISON
16001
CORONADO 15401
COSMEL 14801, 15701, 16201
CRAIG 02701, 14701
CROSLEY 00801, 14701
CROWN 00101, 00401, 02701,
04701, 05201, 14701,
14801, 15401, 15701,
16201
CRYSTAL 14701
CTC 03301
CURTIS MATHES
00301, 00501, 00801,
00901, 01301, 01801,
02001, 02301, 05601,
08901, 11801, 12201,
14701, 15401, 16301,
16601, 16701, 17901,
18101, 18401, 18601,
18701
CXC 02701
DAEWOO 00101, 00301, 00401,
01201, 01601, 02001,
02401, 02601, 02701,
04901, 05601, 07901,
08201, 13101, 14701,
14801, 15401, 15701,
15901, 16201, 16301,
16501, 17901
DAICHI 14801
DANSAI 00401, 15401, 15701,
16201
DAWA 14701, 15701, 16201
DAYTON 00101
DAYTRON 14801, 15401, 15701,
15901, 16201, 16301,
17901
DE GRAAF 02901, 06901
DECCA 00401, 06801, 14701,
15701, 16201
DEITRON 15701, 15901, 16201
DENON 01801
DENVER 14801, 15701, 16201
DESMET 14701, 14801, 15701,
16201
DIAMANT 15701, 16201
DIAMOND 14801
DIGATRON 00401
DIGILINE 15701, 16201
DIGISTAR 17001, 17501
DIGITOR 15701, 16201
DIK 15701, 16201
DIMENSIA 18401, 18701
DIXI 00101, 00401, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16201
DORIC 16101
DTS 14801
DUAL 14701, 14801, 15001,
15301, 15601, 15701,
15801, 16001, 16101,
16201
DUMONT 00201, 15401, 16301
DURABRAND 16801, 17601, 18201
DUX 15701, 16201
D-VISION 15701, 16201
DWIN 09201, 10101
DYNAMIC 14801
DYNATECH 15401
DYNATRON 15701, 16201
DYNEX 15701
ECE 00401
ELBE 03501, 15001, 15701,
16201
ELBIT 14701
ELECS 14701
ELECTRATUNE
15401
ELECTRO TECH
14801
ELECTROBAND
00001
ELECTROHOME
15401, 16301, 17901,
19001
ELECTRONIKA
14701
ELEKTA 14801, 15701, 16201
ELEKTRA 18601
ELEKTRONIKA
14701
ELG 15701, 16201
ELIN 00401, 06901, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16101,
16201
ELITE 04101, 14701, 15401,
15701, 16201
ELTA 00101, 14801, 14901
EMERSON 02001, 02601, 02701,
03101, 04601, 05801,
07901, 15401, 15701,
16201, 16301, 16801,
17201, 17701, 17901,
18201, 18501, 19301
ENVISION 00301, 10601, 16301,
17901
EPSON 11001
ERRES 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
ESC 15701, 16201
ETHER 00101, 00301
ETRON 00101, 14801, 15701,
16201
EUROMAN 15701, 16201
EUROMANN 14701
EUROPA 15701, 16201
EUROPHON 06801, 14701, 15701,
16201
EXCEL 15701, 16201
EXQUISIT 15701, 16201
FAMILY LIFE 15701, 16201
FENNER 14801, 15901
FERGUSON 00401, 01001, 01701,
03201, 03801, 04201,
07101, 15701, 15801,
16201
FIDELIS 14801
FIDELITY 04601, 15701, 16201
FILSAI 14801
FINLANDIA 02901, 04401, 15801
FINLUX 00401, 01401, 01501,
04401, 06801, 14701,
14801, 15101, 15701,
16201
FIRST LINE 14701, 14801, 15701,
15901, 16101, 16201
FIRSTAR 00101, 03101
FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301, 08501
FISHER 01401, 02001, 02901,
04701, 16101, 18901
FLINT 05701, 14701, 15701,
16201
FORMENTI 00401, 04101, 14701,
15701, 16201
List of remote control codes
46 En
FORTRESS 01301, 15401
FRABA 15701, 16201
FRIAC 15701, 16201
FRONTECH 02201, 03301, 03701,
14801, 16101
FUJITSU 08701, 10401, 15401,
15701, 16201
FUJITSU GENERAL
15001
FUNAI 02501, 02701, 03701,
14801, 15401, 17201,
17701, 18201
FUTURE 15701, 16201
FUTURETECH
02701
GALAXI 15701, 16201
GALAXIS 15701, 16201
GALERIA 14801
GATEWAY 13301, 13401
GBC 14801, 15901
GE 00301, 00501, 00601,
01201, 02601, 02701,
05601, 07101, 11801,
12201, 12601, 15801,
16301, 16401, 16601,
17301, 17401, 17901,
18401, 18701, 19001,
19101
GEC 00401, 06801, 15701,
16101, 16201
GELOSO 00101, 14801, 15901
GEMSOUND 14801
GENERAL 14801
GENERAL ELECTRIC
15801
GENERAL TECHNIC
14801
GENEXXA 02201, 14701, 15701,
16201
GIBRALTER 00201, 00301, 16301
GITEM 14701
GM 14801
GMG 14801
GOLDHAND 14801
GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401, 01701,
02001, 02601, 05001,
14701, 14801, 15201,
15401, 15501, 15701,
16201, 16301, 16501,
17701, 17901, 18901
GOODMANS 00401, 04801, 04901,
08201, 14701, 14801,
15701, 15801, 15901,
16201
GOREMJE 04701
GPM 14801
GRADIENTE 00701, 02401, 15701,
16201
GRADIN 14701, 14801
GRAETZ 02201, 04601, 15701,
16201
GRANADA 00401, 02901, 04301,
06801, 14701, 15701,
15801, 16201
GRANDIN 07701, 15701, 15901,
16201
GRENADIER 14801
GRUNDIG 00401, 02801, 06301,
07001, 07401, 15701,
16201
GRUNPY 02701
GTT 14801
HAIER 17601, 18801
HALLMARK 02601, 15401, 16301,
17901
HANKOOK 00301, 02601, 02701
HANSEATIC 00401, 04101, 04601,
05201, 07001, 14701,
14801, 15301, 15701,
16101, 16201
HANTAREX 06801, 14701, 14801,
15701, 16201
HANTOR 15701, 16201
HARLEY DAVIDSON
15401
HARMAN/KARDON
00801
HARRAD 15401
HARVARD 02701, 15401
HARWOOD 15701, 16201
HAUPPAUGE 15701, 16201
HAVERMY 01301
HCM 00101, 05101, 14801,
15701, 16201
HEATHKIT 14701
HEDZON 15701, 16201
HELLO KITTY 05601
HEMMERMANN
16101
HIFIVOX 16001
HIGHLINE 15701, 16201
HILINE 14801
HINARI 00101, 00401, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16201
HISAWA 05701
HISENSE 19201
HITACHI 00101, 00301, 01201,
01501, 01701, 01801,
02201, 02601, 03001,
04501, 06101, 06901,
07301, 11701, 12101,
14701, 15401, 15701,
15801, 16101, 16201,
16301, 17701, 17901,
18601, 18901
HORIZONT 14701
HORNYPHON 14701
HORNYPHONE
15701, 16201
HUA TUN 00101
HUANYU 04901, 15901
HYPER 14801, 15501
HYPSON 00401, 03701, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16201
IBERIA 15701, 16201
ICE 03701, 04801, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16201
ICT 15701, 16201
IMA 15401
IMPERIAL 03301, 04701, 05201,
14701, 15701, 16101,
16201
INDIANA 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
INFINITY 00801, 14701
INGELEN 02201
INGERSOLL 14801
INNO HIT 06801, 14701, 14801,
15201, 15701, 16201
INNOHIT 14701, 14801, 15201
INNOVA 00401
INNOVATION 15701, 16201
INSIGNIA 16801, 17001, 17201,
17501, 17601, 18001,
18201, 19401, 19501
INTEQ 00201
INTERACTIVE
15701, 16201
INTERBUY 14801, 15701, 16201
INTERDISCOUNT
14701
INTERFUNK 00401, 02201, 03301,
04601, 06701, 14701,
15701, 16101, 16201
INTERNAL 15701, 15901, 16201
INTERVISION 00401, 03701, 05001,
14901, 15701, 16201
IRRADIO 14701, 14801, 15101,
15201, 15501, 15701,
16201
IST 14701
ISUKAI 14701, 15701, 16201
ITL 14801
ITS 04801, 14801, 15701,
16201
ITT 02201, 04601, 06901,
16101
ITT NOKIA 16101
ITV 15701, 15901, 16201
JBL 00801, 14701
JC PENNEY 16301, 16401, 16501,
16601, 16701, 17301,
17401, 17801, 17901,
18101, 18401, 18501,
18701, 18901, 19001,
19101,
JCB 00001
JEAN 00101, 00601, 01201,
02101, 03101
JENSEN 09601, 16301, 17901,
19501
JETPOINT 14701
JINLIPU 14801
JMB 15701, 15901, 16201
JULIBEE 16201
JUMBOTRONIC
14701
JVC 00701, 04801, 05801,
08401, 08701, 14701,
18901
KAISER 14701
KAISUI 00101, 14701, 14801,
15701, 16201
KAPSCH 02201
KARCHER 07701, 14701, 14801,
15701, 16201
KATHREIN 07001, 15701, 16201
KAWASHO 16301, 17901
KEC 02701
KENDO 00401, 14701, 14801,
15001, 15701, 16201
KENNEDY 15001
KENWOOD 00301, 15401, 16301,
17901
KIOTA 14801
KITION 16201
KITON 15701
KLH 15401
KNEISSEL 03501, 05401, 15301,
15701, 15901, 16201
KOBIC 14801
KOLIN 00701, 01601, 02701
KOLSTER 14701, 15701, 16101,
16201
KONICHI 14801
KONKA 15701, 16201, 18001,
19401
KORPEL 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
KOSMOS 15701, 16201
KOYODA 00101
KTV 00301, 02701, 15401
KUASHO 14701, 15401
KUBA 16101
KUBA ELECTRONIC
16101
KURAZAI 18601
L&S ELECTRONIC
10301
LEADER 14801
LECSON 15701, 16201
LEGEND 14801
LENCO 14701, 14801, 15701,
15901, 16201
LENOIR 14801
LEVIS AUSTRIA
15701, 16201
LEYCO 00401, 03701, 14701,
15701, 16201
LG 00301, 00401, 00901,
01601, 02601, 09001,
15701, 16201, 16301,
16501, 17701, 17901,
18901
LIESENK & TTER
00401, 15701, 16201
LIESENK?TTER
14701
LIESENKOTTER
14701, 15701, 16201
LIFE 14801
LIFETEC 14801, 15701, 15901,
16201
LINITRON 15401
LLOYD 15401
LLOYD’S 14801
LODGENET 18401, 18601, 18701
LOEWE 06701, 14701, 15701,
16201
LOGIK 15701, 16201, 18401,
18601, 18701
LUMA 14701, 14801, 15001,
15701, 15901, 16201
LUMATRON 15701, 16201
LUX MAY 14701, 15701, 16201
LUXMAN 16301, 17901
LUXOR 04501, 04601, 15201,
16101
LXI 00501, 00801, 02001,
02101, 02601, 14701,
16301, 16601, 17401,
17701, 17901, 18101,
18401, 18701
M ELECTRONIC00101, 00401, 01401,
01501, 01701, 02201,
03801, 04401, 04901,
06001, 14801
M ELECTRONICS14701, 14801
MACYS 15401
MADISON 15701, 16201
MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801, 14701,
14801
MAGNAFON 06801
MAGNASONIC14701, 14801, 15401
MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801, 12001,
12601, 14701, 15701,
16201, 16301, 17201,
17801, 17901
MAGNUM 15701, 16201
MAJESTIC 18401, 18601, 18701
MANESTH 03701, 04101, 14701,
15701, 16201
MANHATTAN 15701, 16201
MARANTZ 00301, 00401, 00801,
07001, 14701, 15701,
16201, 16301, 17901
MARK 00401, 14701, 15701,
15901, 16201
MASUDA 15701, 16201
MATSUI 00101, 00401, 02901,
04801, 06301, 06801,
14701, 14801, 15701,
16101, 16201
MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301
MAVA 15401
MAXAM 14801
MAXELL 14801
MCE 14801
MEDIATOR 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
MEDION 08501, 10301, 11401,
15701, 16201
MEGATRON 01801, 02601, 16301,
17901
MELECTRONIC15701, 15801, 15901,
16101, 16201
MEMOREX 00101, 01901, 02001,
02601, 03401, 05801,
11401, 14801, 16301,
16801, 17901, 18401,
18601, 18701
MEMPHIS 14801
MERCURY 14801, 15701, 16201
METZ 05501, 15701, 16201
MGA 00301, 01901, 02601,
15701, 16201, 16301,
16501, 17901, 18901,
19001
MICROMAXX 10301, 15701, 16201
MICROSTAR 10301
MIDLAND 00201, 00501, 00601,
15401, 16401, 16601,
17401, 18701
MINATO 15701, 16201
MINERVA 06301
MINOKA 05101, 14701, 15701,
16201
MINUTZ 19101
MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301, 01601,
01901, 02001, 02601,
02701, 03101, 03401,
06701, 11201, 11901,
14701, 14801, 15701,
16201, 16301
16501, 17901, 19001
MIVAR 03901, 04001, 06801,
07601, 15201, 15301
MONTGOMERY WARD18401, 18601,
47 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION
18701
MORGAN’S 15701, 16201
MOTOROLA 01301, 14701
MTC 00301, 00901, 06701,
15401, 16101, 16301,
16501, 16701, 17901,
18101
MULTITEC 15701, 16201
MULTITECH 00101, 02701, 14701,
14801, 15401, 15701,
16101, 16201
MUSIKLAND 15701, 16201
MYRYAD 07001, 15701, 16201
NAD 02101, 02601, 04601,
11301, 16301, 17901,
18101
NAIKO 15701, 16201
NAKIMURA 15701, 15901, 16201
NAMSUNC 14801
NATIONAL 14701
NEC 00101, 00301, 00601,
02001, 02101, 02401,
02601, 05701, 06501,
13201, 14801, 15701,
15901, 16201, 16301,
16501, 17901
NECKERMANN00401, 07001, 14701,
14801, 15001, 15701,
16101, 16201
NEI 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
NETSAT 00401, 15701, 16201
NEUFUNK 15701, 16201
NEWAVE 00101, 01201, 01301,
02601
NEWTECH 14701, 14801, 15701,
15801, 16201
NEXXTECH 17501
NIKKAI 00401, 03701, 14701,
15401, 15701, 16201
NIKKO 00301, 01201, 02601,
16301, 17901
NOBLEX 14801
NOBLIKO 15101
NOGAMATIC 16001
NOKIA 04601, 05901, 06001,
06901, 08101, 14801,
15901, 16101
NONAME 14701
NORCENT 09301, 10801
NORDMENDE 01701, 03801, 07101,
15701, 15801, 16001,
16201
NORMEREL 15701, 16201
NOVABEAM 14701
NOVATRONIC 14701, 14801, 15701,
15901, 16201
NTC 01201
O GENERAL 14801
OCEANIC 02201, 04601
OKANO 14801, 15701, 16201
OLEVIA 19701, 19801, 19901,
20001
OLYMPIC 14801
ONCEAS 14801
ONWA 02701, 05301
OPERA 14701, 15701, 16201
OPTIMUS 02001, 02301, 03401,
08301
OPTONICA 01301
ORBIT 14701, 15701, 16201
ORIENT 14801
ORION 00401, 03101, 04101,
05801, 06801, 14701,
14801, 15401, 15701,
16201, 16801
ORLINE 15701, 16201
ORMOND 15701, 16201
OSAKI 03701, 05101, 15701,
15901, 16201
OSIO 15701, 16201
OSUME 15701, 16201
OTF 14801
OTTO VERSAND00401, 04101, 06701,
07001, 14701, 14801,
14901, 15501, 15601,
15701, 15801, 16101,
16201
OTTO-VERSAND14701, 14801, 14901
PACIFIC 15701, 16201
PAEL 15101
PALLADIUM 04701, 05201, 14701,
15701, 16101, 16201
PALSONIC 15701, 16201
PANAMA 03701, 14801, 15701,
16201
PANASHIBA 14801
PANASONIC 00401, 00601, 00801,
02201, 03401, 08301,
12401, 14701, 15701,
16201, 16401
PANAVISION 15701, 16201
PANAVOX 14801
PANORAMA 14801
PATHE CINEMA03201, 04101, 15301,
16101
PATHE MARCONI16001
PAUSA 00101, 14801
PCE/PEC 15401
PENNEY 00301, 00501, 00601,
00901, 02101, 02601,
12201, 15401
PERDIO 04101, 15701, 16201
PERFEKT 14701, 15701, 16201
PHILCO 00301, 00401, 00801,
01801, 02601, 02701,
03301, 05801, 13101,
14701, 14801, 15701,
16201, 16301, 16501,
17801, 17901
PHILIPS 00001, 00301, 00401,
00601, 00801, 01201,
01601, 02601, 04901,
07001, 08801, 12601,
15701, 15801, 15901,
16201, 16301
17201, 17301, 17801,
18201
PHILIPS (F) 14701
PHOENIX 14701, 15701, 16201
PHONOLA 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
PILOT 00301, 15701, 16201,
16301
PIONEER 01701, 02201, 02301,
03801, 08601, 09501,
11301, 14701, 15701,
15801, 16201, 16301,
17901
PLANTRON 14701, 14801, 15701,
16201
POLAROID 19201, 19501, 19601
POPPY 14801
PORTLAND 01201, 15401, 15901,
16301, 16501, 17901
PRANDONI PRINCE15101
PRANDONI-PRINCE06801
PRICE CLUB 16701
PRIMA 09601, 14801, 15401,
17001, 17501
PRINCESS 14801
PRINZ 16101
PRISM 00601, 16401
PROELCO 14701
PROFEX 00101, 04601, 14801,
14901
PROFITRONIC 14701, 15701, 16201
PROLINE 15701, 16201
PROSCAN 00501, 16601, 17401,
18401, 18701
PROSONIC 15701, 15901, 16201
PROTEC 14701, 14801
PROTECH 00101, 00401, 03301,
03701, 05201, 08501,
15701, 16101
PROTECT 16201
PROTON 00101, 00301, 02601,
14801, 15401, 16301,
17901, 18901
PROVISION 15701, 16201
PULSAR 00201, 16301
PULSER 14701, 14801, 15401
PYE 14701, 15701, 15901,
16101, 16201
PYMI 14801
QUASAR 00601, 03401, 08301,
16401
QUELLE 00401, 01401, 04601,
06701, 14701, 14801,
15001, 15101, 15201,
15401, 15501, 15701,
16101, 16201
R LINE 14701, 15701, 16201
RADIALVA 15701, 16201
RADIO SHACK15401, 15701, 16201,
16301, 17701, 17901,
18401, 18701, 18901
RADIOLA 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
RADIOMARELLI06801, 15701, 16201
RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501, 02001,
02601, 02701
RADIOSTONE 16201
RADIOTONE 14701, 14801, 15701
RCA 00001, 00301, 00501,
01101, 01201, 02601,
08601, 11501, 11801,
13901, 12201, 12501,
12601, 12801, 15801,
16301, 16401
16501, 16601, 17401,
17901, 18401, 18701,
19001
REALISTIC 00301, 02001, 02601,
02701, 16301, 17701,
17901, 18401, 18701,
18901
RECOR 15701, 16201
RECORD 14701
RECTILIGNE 15701, 16201
REDIFFUSION 04601
REDSTAR 15701, 16201
REFLEX 15701, 16201
REGENTE 14801
REOC 09001
REVOX 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
REVOX/STUDER14701
REX 02201, 03501, 03701,
15001, 15301
RFT 05201, 15301, 15701,
16201
RICOH 15701, 16201
R-LINE 00401
RMB 15401
ROADSTAR 00101, 03701, 05201,
14801, 15701, 16201
RODEX 15701, 16201
ROSITA 14801
ROWA 14801
ROYAL 14801
RUKOPIR 15701, 16201
RUNCO 00201, 00301, 06501,
07501
SABA 01701, 02201, 03801,
04201, 15801, 16001
SACCS 03201
SAGEM 07701
SAISHO 00101, 03701, 06801,
14701
SAIVOD 15701, 16201
SAKURA 14801
SALORA 02201, 04601, 06901,
15201, 16101
SAMBERS 06801, 15101, 15201
SAMPO 00101, 00301, 01201,
01301, 02001, 02501,
02601, 08301, 13301,
15401, 16301, 17901,
18901
SAMSUNG 00101, 00301, 00401,
00901, 01101, 01201,
02001, 02601, 03701,
04701, 07001, 07401,
07801, 08901, 09801,
10501, 10701
14701, 14801, 15201,
15401, 15701, 16201,
16301, 16501, 16601,
16701, 17901, 18101,
18901, 20301
SAMSUX 15401, 17901
SAMTRON 16701
SANKY 15401
SANSEI 05601
SANSUI 05801, 14701, 14801,
15401, 15701, 16201,
16801
SANYO 01401, 02001, 02701,
02901, 04301, 10201,
14801, 15301, 15701,
16201, 16301, 18901
SAVE 15701, 16201
SBR 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
SCEPTRE 20201
SCHAUB LORENZ
04601, 15901, 16101
SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301, 04801,
08501, 14701, 14801,
15001, 15301, 15501,
15601, 15701, 15801,
16101, 16201
SCOTCH 02601, 16301, 17901
SCOTT 02601, 02701, 03101,
15401, 16301, 17901
SEARS 00501, 00801, 02001,
02101, 02501, 02601,
16301, 16601, 16701,
17201, 17401, 17901,
18101, 18201, 18401,
18701, 18901
SEG 03701, 08501, 14801,
15401, 15701, 16101,
16201
SEI 06801, 15701, 16101,
16201
SEI-SINUDYNE
14701, 15701, 16201
SELECO 02201, 03501, 15001,
15301
SEMIVOX 02701
SEMP 02101
SEMUA 15401
SENCORA 14801
SENTRA 16101
SHARP 00301, 01301, 08301,
15401, 16301, 17901
SHEN YING 00101, 01201
SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301, 03101
SHINTOSHI 15701, 16201
SHIVAKI 14701, 15701, 15901,
16201
SHOGUN 16301
SHOW 14801
SIAREM 06801
SIEMENS 00401, 02801, 14701,
15401, 15701, 16201
SIERA 15701, 16201
SIERRA 14701
SIGNATURE 18401, 18601, 18701,
19301
SILMA 14701
SILVA 14801, 15701, 16201
SILVER 15701, 16201
SIMPSON 17801
SINGER 14701, 14801, 15701,
16201
SINUDYNE 06801, 14701, 15001,
15701, 16101, 16201
SKANTIC 04501
SKY 00401, 15701, 16201
SKYGIANT 02701
SKYWORTH 00401
SNYDER 14701
SOLAVOX 02201, 15701, 16201
SONIKO 15701, 16201
SONITRON 02901
SONNECLAIR 15701, 16201
SONOKO 00101, 00401, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16201
SONOLOR 02201, 02901
SONTEC 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
SONY 00001, 08301, 11101,
11601, 12701, 12901,
15701, 16201
SOUND & VISION
48 En
15701, 15901, 16201
SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701, 15401,
16301, 17801, 17901
SOUNDMASTER
14801
SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201, 15701,
16201
SOWA 00601, 00901, 01201,
02101, 02601
SPECTRICIAN 14701, 15401
SQUAREVIEW 02501, 18201
SSS 02701, 16301
STANDARD 00101, 14801, 15701,
15901, 16201
STARLITE 02701, 14801, 15701,
16201
STARLUX 14801
STERN 02201, 03501, 15001,
15301
STRATO 15701, 16201
SUNIC LINE 15701, 16201
SUNKAI 15701, 16201
SUNSTAR 14801, 15701, 16201
SUNWOOD 14701, 14801, 15701,
16201
SUPERSCAN 17201
SUPERTEC 14801
SUPERTECH 14801, 15701, 16201
SUPRA 14801, 15901, 16301
SUPREMACY 15401
SUPREME 00001
SUTRON 14801
SYC LINE 14801
SYLVANIA 00301, 00801, 02501,
14701, 16301, 16801,
17201, 17701, 17801,
17901, 18201
SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701, 15401,
17201, 17701, 18201
SYNCO 00001, 00901, 01201,
01301, 02601, 05601
SYNTAX 19701
SYSLINE 00401, 15701, 16201
T + A 05501
TACICO 00101, 01201, 02601
TAI YI 00101
TANDBERG 15001
TANDY 01301, 02201
TASHIKO 01201, 08301
TATUNG 00101, 00401, 00601,
00801, 00901, 02001,
02101, 06801, 14701,
15701, 16201, 18801
TCM 10301
TEAC 00101, 00401, 03701,
05101, 05201, 05701,
08501, 11401, 15701,
16101, 16201
TEAK 14801
TEC 03301, 14801, 15001,
15701, 16201
TECH LINE 15701, 16201
TECHNEMA 04101
TECHNICS 00601, 03401, 08301,
14701, 16401
TECHNILAND 14701
TECHNISAT 15701, 16201
TECHNOL 14801
TECHWOOD 00601, 16301, 16401,
17901
TECNISON 14801
TECO 00101, 00601, 01201,
01301, 02601, 03701,
08401
TEDELEX 14801, 15701, 16201
TEKNANT 14701, 14801
TEKNIKA 00801, 00901, 01201,
01901, 02701, 15401,
16301, 16501, 16701,
17801, 17901, 18101,
18401, 18601, 18701,
18901,
TEKON 14801
TELEAVIA 15801, 16001
TELECOR 15701, 16201
TELEFAC 14801
TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601, 04201,
08001, 08901, 15701,
15801, 16001, 16201
TELEFUSION 15701, 16201
TELEGAZI 15701, 16201
TELEMEISTER
04101, 15701, 16201
TELEOPTA 14801
TELERENT 18401, 18601, 18701
TELESONIC 15701, 16201
TELESTAR 14801, 15701, 16201
TELETECH 00101, 14801, 15701,
16201
TELETON 16101
TELEVIEW 15701, 16201
TEMPEST 14801, 15701, 16201
TENNESSEE 15701, 16201
TENSAI 04101, 14701, 14801,
15701, 15901, 16201
TENSON 14801
TERA 00301, 16301
TESLA 14701
TESLA ORAVA14701
TEVION 15701, 16201
TEXET 15901
THOMAS 14701, 14801, 15401
THOMSON 01701, 03801, 07101,
08001, 12501, 15701,
15801, 16001, 16101,
16201
THORN 00401, 01401, 04601,
06701, 14701, 15101,
15701, 15801, 15901,
16201
THORN-FERGUSON
14701, 15001
TMK 02601, 16301, 17901
TNCI 00201
TOBO 14801
TOKAI 14701, 15701, 15901,
16201
TOSHIBA 00901, 02001, 02101,
06601, 07801, 08301,
10901, 12101, 12301,
13001, 13201, 16701,
18101, 18901
TOSONIC 15401
TOTEVISION 15401
TOWADA 16101
TRANS CONTINENS
15701, 16201
TRANSONIC 15701, 16201
TREVI 14801
TRIAD 14701, 15701, 16201
TRILUX 14701
TRIUMPH 06801, 15701, 16201
TRIVISION 14801
TUNTEX 00101, 00301, 01201
TVS 05801
TVTEXT 95 16201
UHER 04101, 14701, 15701,
15901, 16201
ULTRAVOX 15701, 15901, 16201
UMA 14701
UNIC LINE 15701, 16101, 16201
UNIMOR 14701
UNITED 15701, 16201
UNIVERSAL 17301, 19101
UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401, 01501,
03701, 04401, 04701,
06401, 14701, 14801,
15701, 16101, 16201
UNIVOX 15701, 16201
URANYA 14801
VANGUARD 14801
VECO 14801
VECTOR RESEARCH
00301
VESTEL 00401, 14701, 15701,
16201
VEXA 14701, 14801, 15701,
16201
VICTOR 00701, 03401, 08301,
08401
VIDEO SYSTEM
14701, 15701, 16201
VIDEOSAT 03301
VIDEOTECHNIC
15901
VIDIKRON 00801
VIDION 14801
VIDTECH 02601, 16301, 16501,
17901
VIEWSONIC 13301
VISION 04101, 14801, 15701,
16201
VISON 14701
VIZIO 18801
VORTEC 14701, 15701, 16201
VOXSON 02201, 14701, 15701,
16201
WALTHAM 04501, 15701, 16201
WARDS 00301, 00801, 02601,
11301, 14701, 16301,
16501, 17301, 17801,
17901, 18401, 18601,
18701, 19101
WATSON 00401, 04101, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16201
WATT RADIO 16101
WAYCON 02101
WEGA 15701, 16201
WEGAVOX 14701, 14801, 15701,
16201
WELTBLICK 14701, 15701, 16201
WESTON 15701, 16201
WHARFEDALE
15701, 16201
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
00401, 04101, 05801,
07901, 14701, 15701,
16201, 17701
WINSTON 14701, 14801
WINTERNITZ 14801
WORLDVIEW 14701, 14801
XRYPTON 15701, 16201
YAMAHA 00301, 01801, 08301,
10001, 11001, 13501,
13601, 13701, 13801,
14001, 14101, 14201,
16301, 16501, 17901
YAMAJI 03609
YAMISHI 15701, 16201
YAPSHE 03401
YOKAN 15701, 16201
YOKO 00401, 03701, 14701,
14801, 15701, 16201
YORK 14701
ZENITH 00201, 01201, 02601,
05801, 14701, 16301,
16801, 17701, 17901,
18601, 19301
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
02805, 05605
AIWA 05605, 05705, 07105
AKAI 07505
ALBA 02605
AMSTRAD 02305
APEX 07605, 08705
APEX DIGITAL
02105, 02605, 03005,
03505, 03605, 03705,
04105, 05805
AUDIOVOX 08805
AXION 08805
BBK 06105, 06205, 06305,
06405, 06505, 06605,
06705, 06805, 06905,
07005
BLAUPINKT 02605
BLAUPUNKT 08705
BLUE PARADE
01005
BLUE SKY 05805
BRANDT 06005
BUSH 02305, 05905
CENTREX 02105
CENTRIOS 08805
CINEVISION 07405
CLASSIC 05605
CLATRONIC 03405
COBY 07305, 07605, 07905,
08005, 08105, 08305,
08505
CONCEPT 08705
CONIA 05805
CROWN 06005
CURTIS INTERNATIONAL
08505
CYBERHOME 02405
CYTRON 06005
DAEWOO 03205, 03305
DANSAI 03205
DECCA 03205
DENON 00005
DIAMOND 03105, 06005
DIGITREX 02105, 07605
Digitrex 05805
DISNEY 08405
DUAL 05605, 06005
DURABRAND 07405
DVD2000 00205
ELTA 05905, 07205, 07505
EMERSON 01205, 07405, 07805,
08405, 08605
ENTERPRISE 01205
FERGUSON 06005
FISHER 02005
FUNAI 07805, 08405
GE 00305, 02605, 08705
GO VIDEO 02505
GOLDSTAR 02905, 07405
GOODMANS 05905, 06005
GRADIENTE 01805
GREENHILL 02605, 08705
GRUNDIG 00705, 06005
HARMAN KARDON
08205
HARMAN/KARDON
05505
HELIOS 09205
HITACHI 01105, 01905
HITEKER 02105, 05805, 07605
INITIAL 08705
INSIGNIA 07405, 07705, 07805,
08705, 08805
JBL 08205
JVC 00905, 01305
KENWOOD 00005, 00605
KLH 02605, 08705
KONKA 07705
KOSS 01805
KXD 07305
LENCO 06005
LENOXX 05905, 07505
LG 02905, 07405
LIFETEC 06005
LIMIT 03105
LIQUIDVIDEO 08805
MAGNAVOX 00105, 02205, 07805
MARANTZ 00705, 07405
MATSUI 06005
MBO 05905
MEDION 06005
MEMOREX 03805
MICO 02705
MICROSOFT 00305
MINTEK 02605, 08705
MITSUBISHI 00205
MUSTEK 02805, 05605
Mx ONDA 06005
NAD 07405
NESA 02605, 08705
NORCENT 08005, 08505
ONKYO 00105
OPPO 08905, 09005, 09105
ORITRON 01805, 06005
PALSONIC 02105, 05805
PANASONIC 00005, 01605, 04205
PHILIPS 00105, 00705, 01705,
03905, 07805, 08405
PIONEER 00405, 01005, 01505,
01605
POLK AUDIO 00705
PORTLAND 07505
PROLINE 06005
PROSCAN 00305
PROSONIC 08005
QWESTAR 01805
49 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION
RCA 00305, 01005, 02605,
08705
RIO 07405
ROADSTAR 05905
ROTEL 01305
SABA 06005
SAMSUNG 01105, 04505
SANYO 02005
SCHNEIDER 06005
SCOTT 05805, 06005
SEARS 07805
SHANGHAI 05805
SHARP 01405
SHERWOOD 03205
SHINCO 08705
SHINSONIC 00505, 08705
SINGER 05905
SKYMASTER 05605
SLIM ART 03305
SM ELECTRONIC
02805
SM ELECTRONICS
05605, 05905
SONY 00505, 04005
STANDARD 06005
SUPERSCAN 07805
SV2000 07805
SVA 05805
SYLVANIA 02205, 07805, 08405
SYMPHONIC 07805, 08405, 08605
TATUNG 03205
TEAC 01005, 02605
TECHNICS 00005
TENSAI 05905, 06005
TEVION 06005
THETA DIGITAL
01005
THOMSON 00305
TOSHIBA 00105, 04605
URBAN CONCEPTS
00105
VOXSON 05605
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
08405
XBOX 00305
YAMAHA 00005, 00705, 00805,
04305, 04405
YUKAI 05605
ZENITH 00105, 01205, 02905,
07405
ZEUS 03305
BD PLAYER
DENON 01307
LG 00907
LOEWE 00307
MARANTZ 00707
ONKYO 00207
PANASONIC 00807
PHILIPS 00607
PIONEER 01007, 01107
SAMSUMG 00507
SHARP 01207
SONY 00407
YAMAHA 00007, 00107
DVD RECORDER
PHILIPS 00806
VICTOR 01406
YAMAHA 00706
VCR
ADMIRAL 01102
ADVENTURA 00002
AIKO 02102
AIWA 00002, 00402, 02202,
02602, 02702
AKAI 00602, 02302, 04902,
05902, 06602
AKIBA 01402
ALBA 01402, 02102, 02302,
02702
AMERICA ACTION
02102
AMERICAN HIGH
00302, 06402
AMSTRAD 00002, 04702
ANAM 00402, 01902, 02002,
02102, 02902
ANAM NATIONAL
01902, 04502
ANITECH 01402
ASA 00402, 01502
ASHA 02002, 05502
ASUKA 00402
AUDIO DYNAMICS
05402, 05802, 06002
AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102, 05702
BAIRD 00002, 00602, 01602,
04902
BASIC LINE 01402, 02102
BEAUMARK 02002, 05502
BELL & HOWELL
01602, 06102
BLAUPUNKT 01902, 04602, 04802,
05102, 05302
BRANDT 02402
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
00602
BROKSONIC 01702, 02602, 04402
BUSH 01402, 02102, 02702
CALIX 00402, 05702
CANDLE 05402, 05502, 05702
CANNON 05602, 06402
CANON 00302
CARVER 01502
CCE 01402, 02102
CGE 00002, 04702
CIMLINE 01402
CINERAL 02102
CINEVISION 05702
CITIZEN 00402, 02102, 04302,
05402, 05502, 05702
COLORTYME 05402
COLT 01402
COMBITECH 02702
CRAIG 00402, 01002, 01402,
02002, 05502, 05702
CROWN 01402, 02102
CURTIS MATHES
00302, 00602, 01202,
03702, 05402, 05502,
05602, 05902, 06402
CYBERNEX 02002, 05502
CYRUS 01502
DAEWOO 00902, 01602, 02102,
03402, 04302, 06302
DANSAI 01402
DBX 05402, 05802, 06002
DE GRAAF 00702
DECCA 00002, 01502, 04702
DEGRAAF 04702
DENON 00702
DIMENSIA 05602
DUAL 00602
DUMONT 00002, 01502, 01602,
04702
DURABRAND 05702
DYNATECH 00002, 04702, 05902,
06302
ELCATECH 01402
ELECTROHOME
00402, 05702
ELECTROPHONIC
00402, 05702
EMEREX 00102
EMERSON 00002, 00302, 00402,
00802, 00902, 01702,
02002, 02102, 04302,
04402, 04702, 05002,
05502, 05702, 05902,
06102, 06302, 06402
ESC 02002, 02102
FERGUSON 00602, 02402
FIDELITY 00002, 04702
FINLANDIA 01502, 01602
FINLUX 00002, 00702, 01502,
01602, 04702, 04802,
04902
FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802, 00902,
01402
FISHER 01002, 01602, 05402,
06102
FUJI 00202, 00302, 06402
FUJITSU 00002, 00902
FUNAI 00002, 04702, 05902,
06302
GARRARD 00002, 06302
GE 00302, 01202, 02002,
03502, 03702, 03802,
05502, 05602, 06402
GEC 01502
GENERAL 00902
GO VIDEO 02802
GOLDHAND 01402
GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802, 02902,
04202, 05402, 05702,
05902
GOODMANS 00002, 00402, 01402,
02102, 04702
GO-VIDEO 05502
GRADIENTE 00002, 06302
GRAETZ 00602, 01602, 02002
GRANADA 01502, 01602
GRANADA (UK)
04602, 04802
GRANDIN 00002, 00402, 01402
GRUNDIG 01402, 01502, 01902,
02502, 04602
HANSEATIC 00402
HARLEY DAVIDSON
00002, 06302
HARMAN KARDON
05402
HARMAN/KARDON
01502
HARWOOD 01402
HCM 01402
HEADQUARTER
05902, 06102, 06502,
06602
HINARI 01402, 02002, 02702,
05002
HI-Q 01002
HITACHI 00002, 00402, 00602,
00702, 02002, 04702,
06202
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
00702
HYPSON 01402
IMPERIAL 00002, 04702
INSIGNIA 05702
INSTANT REPLAY
05902, 06402
INTEQ 05702
INTERFUNK 01502
ITT 00602, 01602, 02002,
04902
ITT-NOKIA 04902
ITV 00402, 02102
JC PENNEY 05402, 05502, 05602,
05702, 05802, 06002,
06102, 06202, 06402,
06502, 06602, 06702
JCL 06402
JENSEN 00602, 06202, 06602
JVC 00602, 00902, 01302,
05402, 05802, 06002,
06102, 06602
KAISUI 01402
KEC 00402, 02102
KENDO 04902
KENWOOD 00602, 01302, 05402,
05802, 06002, 06102,
06602
KLH 01402
KODAK 00302, 00402, 05702,
06402
KOLIN 00602, 00802
KORPEL 01402
LENCO 02102
LEYCO 01402
LG 00402, 00702, 00902,
02902, 05902
LLOYD 04702, 05902, 06302
LLOYD’S 00002
LOEWE 00402, 01502, 04502
LOEWE OPTA 04602
LOGIK 01402, 02002
LUXOR 00802, 01102, 01602,
04902
LXI 00402, 05702, 05902
M ELECTRONIC
00002, 04702
MAGNASONIC
04302
MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302, 00502,
01502, 05602, 05902,
06402
MAGNIN 02002, 05502
MANESTH 00902, 01402
MARANTZ 00302, 01502, 04602,
05402, 05802, 06002,
06102, 06402
MARTA 00402, 05702
MATSUI 02602, 02702, 05002
MATSUSHITA 00302, 06402
MEDION 02602
MEI 00302, 06402
MEMOREX 00002, 00302, 00402,
00502, 01002, 01102,
01602, 02002, 02202,
02602, 04202, 04702,
05502, 05702, 05902,
06102, 06302
06402
MEMPHIS 01402
METZ 00402, 02502, 04502,
04602, 05202
MGA 00802, 02002
MGN TECHNOLOGY
02002, 05502
MINERVA 04602
MINOLTA 00702, 06202, 06502
MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802, 01302,
01502, 03502, 05802,
06002, 06202
MOTOROLA 00302, 01102, 06402
MTC 00002, 02002, 04702,
05502, 05902, 06302
MULTITECH 00002, 01402, 04702,
05502, 05902, 06302
MURPHY 00002, 04702
MYRYAD 01502
NAD 01602
NATIONAL 01902, 04802
NEC 00302, 00402, 00602,
01102, 01302, 01602,
05402, 05802, 06002,
06102, 06602
NECKERMANN
01502, 04602, 05002
NESCO 01402
NEWAVE 00402
NIKKO 00402, 05702
NOBLEX 02002, 05502
NOBLIKO 04602
NOKIA 00602, 01602, 02002,
04902
NORDMENDE
00602, 02402
OCEANIC 00002, 00602
OKANO 02302, 02602
OLYMPUS 00302, 01902, 04802,
06402
OPTIMUS 00402, 01102, 01602,
02802, 05502, 05702
OPTONICA 05502
ORION 01702, 02602, 02702,
04402, 05002
OSAKA 04702
OSAKI 00002, 00402, 01402,
04702
OTTO VERSAND
01502
PALLADIUM 00402, 00602, 01402
PANASONIC 00302, 01802, 01902,
03102, 03702, 04502,
04802, 05102, 05302,
05602, 06402
PATHE MARCONI
00602
PENNEY 00302, 00402, 00702,
02002, 03702, 04202
50 En
PENTAX 00702, 05402, 06202,
06502
PERDIO 00002, 04702
PHILCO 00302, 05602, 06402
PHILIPS 00302, 01502, 03202,
03902, 04002, 04602,
06402
PHONOLA 01502
PILOT 00402, 05702
PIONEER 00702, 01302, 01502,
05802, 06002, 06202,
06702
POLK AUDIO 01502
PROFITRONIC 02002
PROLINE 00002, 04702
PROSCAN 01202, 03802, 05602
PROTEC 01402
PULSAR 00502
PYE 01502
QUARTER 06102
QUARTZ 06102
QUASAR 00302, 03702, 05602,
06402
QUELLE 01502, 04602, 04802,
05002
RADIO SHACK
05502, 05602, 05702,
05902, 06102, 06302,
06402
RADIOLA 01502
RADIOSHACK 00002
RADIX 00402, 05702
RANDEX 00402, 05702
RCA 00302, 00702, 01202,
02002, 03502, 03702,
03802, 05502, 05602,
05702, 06202, 06402,
06502
REALISTIC 00002, 00302, 00402,
01002, 01102, 01602,
04702, 05502, 05602,
05702, 05902, 06102,
06302, 06402
REOC 02602
REPLAYTV 03002, 03102
REX 00602
RIO 05702
ROADSTAR 00402, 01402, 02002,
02102
RUNCO 00502
SABA 00602, 02402
SAISHO 05002
SALORA 00802
SAMPO 00402, 01102
SAMSUNG 00902, 02002, 02802,
05502, 06202
SANKY 00502, 01102
SANSUI 00002, 00602, 01302,
04402, 05802, 06002,
06602
SANYO 01002, 01602, 02002,
05502, 06102
SAVILLE 02702
SBR 01502
SCHAUB LORENZ
00002, 00602, 01602
SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402, 01502,
04702
SCOTT 00802, 00902, 01702
SEARS 00002, 00302, 00402,
00702, 01002, 01602,
04202, 05702, 06102,
06202, 06402, 06502,
06702
SEG 02002
SEI 01502
SELECO 00602
SEMP 00902
SHARP 01102, 03502, 05902
SHINTOM 01402, 01602, 06202
SHOGUN 05502
SIEMENS 00402, 01502, 01602,
04602
SIGNATURE 05902
SILVA 00402
SINGER 00902, 01402, 06402
SINUDYNE 01502, 05202
SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102
SONTEC 00402
SONY 00002, 00102, 00202,
00302, 03302, 04102,
04702
STS 00702, 06202, 06402,
06502
SUNKAI 02602
SUNSTAR 00002, 04702
SUNTRONIC 00002
SYLVANIA 00002, 00302, 00802,
01502, 04702, 05602,
05902, 06302, 06402
SYMPHONIC 00002, 04702, 05902,
06302
TANDBERG 05002, 05202
TANDY 00002, 01602, 05902,
06102
TASHIKO 00002, 00402, 04702,
05702
TATUNG 00002, 00602, 00902,
01302, 01502, 04702,
06602
TEAC 00002, 00602, 02102,
02202, 03402, 04702,
05902, 06302, 06602
TECHNICS 00302, 01902, 04802,
06402
TECO 00302, 00402, 00602,
01102
TEKNIKA 00002, 00302, 00402,
04702, 05702, 05902,
06302, 06402
TELEAVIA 00602
TELEFUNKEN
00602, 02402
TENOSAL 01402
TENSAI 00002
THOMAS 00002
THOMSON 00602, 01202, 01302,
02402
THORN 00602, 01602
TIVO 03202, 03302
TMK 02002, 05002, 05502
TOSHIBA 00602, 00802, 00902,
01302, 01502, 03602,
06202
TOTEVISION 00402, 02002, 05502,
05702
UHER 02002
UNITECH 02002, 05502
UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402, 01502,
02002
VECTOR 00902
VECTOR RESEARCH
05402, 05802, 06002
VICTOR 00602, 01302, 05802,
06002
VIDEO CONCEPTS
00902, 05402, 05802,
06002
VIDEOMAGIC 00402
VIDEOSONIC 02002, 05502
VILLAIN 00002
WARDS 00002, 00302, 00702,
01002, 01102, 01202,
01402, 01502, 02002,
05502, 05602, 05702,
05902, 06202, 06302,
06402, 06502
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
01402, 05902
XR-1000 00002, 00302, 01402,
06302, 06402
YAMAHA 00602, 05402, 05802,
06002, 06602
YAMISHI 01402
YOKAN 01402
YOKO 02002
ZENITH 00002, 00202, 00502,
04402, 05702, 05802,
05902, 06002
CABLE TV TUNER
ABC 00103, 00203, 02803,
04703
ADELPHIA 04503
ALLEGRO 02903, 03403
AMERICAST 02003
ANTRONIX 03703, 03803
ARCHER 03703, 03803, 04003,
04303
AT&T 04503
BELL SOUTH 02003
BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS
00803
BRITISH TELECOM
00103
CABLETENNA03703
CABLEVIEW 03703
CENTURY 04303
CITIZEN 04303
COGECO 04503
COMCAST 04503
COMTRONICS 03103
CONTEC 03503
DAERYUNG 00203, 01403, 01903
DIRECTOR 01303
FILMNET 01203
GARRARD 04303
GC ELECTRONICS
03803
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
00103, 00803, 01303,
01703
GENERAL INSTRUMENT (GI)
02803, 04503, 04703,
04803
GOLDSTAR 00503
HAMLIN 00303, 00703
HITACHI 04703
JASCO 04303
JERROLD 00103, 00803, 01303,
01703, 02803, 04203,
04703
LG 00503
MAGNAVOX 03203
MEMOREX 00003
MNET 01203
MOTOROLA 00803, 01303, 01703,
02303, 02803, 04503,
04703, 04803
MOVIE TIME 03603
NOKIA 04903
NOOS 01803
NSC 03603
OAK 03503, 03903
PACE 00603, 02203
PANASONIC 00003, 00203, 00403,
02703
PARAGON 00003
PHILIPS 01003, 01103, 03203,
04303
PHILIPS-MAGNAVOX
03003, 03303
PIONEER 00503, 01603, 01903
PULSAR 00003
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
00103
QUASAR 00003
RADIO SHACK
03003, 03303, 03403
RCA 02403, 02503, 04303
REALISTIC 03803
REGAL 00703, 00903
REMBRANDT 04703
RUNCO 00003
SAGEM 01803
SAMSUNG 00003, 00503
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
00203, 01403, 01903
SHAW 04503
SIGNATURE 04703
SONY 02103
STARCOM 00103
SUPERCABLE 00803
TANDY 04103
TELE+1 01203
TOCOM 02803, 04203, 04403,
04803
TORX 00103
TOSHIBA 00003
TRANS PX 00803
TS 00103
TV86 03603
UNIKA 03703, 03803, 04303
UNITED CABLE
00103
UNIVERSAL 02903, 03703, 03803,
04003, 04303, 04603
VIEWSTAR 03103, 03203, 03603,
04103
VERIZON FIOS
05003, 05103
ZENITH 00003, 01503, 02003,
03403, 04303
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 06404
ABSAT 00104
ALBA 01404
ALPHASTAR 02504
AMSTRAD 03004
ASTON 00304, 05004
ASTRO 00604
ATSAT 06404
AVALON 01304
BLAUPUNKT 00604
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
03004, 05204
CANAL DIGITAL
03104
CANAL SATELLITE
03104
CANAL+ 03104
CHAPARRAL 00804
CITYCOM 05304
COMAG 09004, 09104, 09704,
10104, 10304, 11604,
11704, 11804, 12004
CONNEXIONS 01304
CROSSDIGITAL
04604
CYRUS 00704
DAERYUNG 01304
DAEWOO 06304
D-BOX 02104, 04904
DIGENIUS 01104
DIRECTV 00904, 01204, 01504,
01704, 02204, 02304,
02804, 04104, 04604,
05104, 06904
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
02604, 03704
DISHPRO 02604, 03704
DISTRATEL 00004
DMT 04004
DNT 00704, 01304
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
05804
DREAMBOX 08604, 08704, 09604,
09804, 09904, 10004,
10404, 10604
ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304, 01604,
02604, 03104, 03604,
03704, 04304
ENGEL 03804
EXPRESSVU 02604
FINLUX 01404
FOXTEL 07004, 07104, 07204,
07304, 07404
FRACARRO 03604
FTE 03404
FUBA 01304
GALAXIS 03404, 04704
GE 01504
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
03504, 08204, 08304
GOI 02604
GOLD BOX 03104
GRUNDIG 00604, 03004
HIRSCHMANN
00604, 01304
HITACHI 01404, 02804
HOUSTON 08504, 10704, 10804,
11004, 11104, 11304,
11904
HTS 02604
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
51 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION
02304, 05104, 06904
HUMAX 03404, 05304
INVIDEO 03604
JVC 02604
KATHREIN 00104, 00604, 00704,
01004, 01804, 05604
KREISELMEYER
00604
LABGEAR 06304
LOGIX 03804
LORENZEN 01104
MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204
MANHATTAN 01404, 03804, 04204
MARANTZ 00704
MEDIASAT 03104
MEMOREX 02204
METRONIC 00004
MITSUBISHI 02304
MOTOROLA 03504
MYRYAD 00704
NEXT LEVEL 03504
NOKIA 01404, 02104, 02404,
04904, 05704, 06804
OCTALTV 03704
ORBITECH 04504
PACE 01404, 03004, 05204,
06604
PANASONIC 00904, 01904, 03004,
06504
PANDA 01404
PAYSAT 02204
PHILIPS 00204, 00704, 01404,
02004, 02204, 02304,
03104, 04104, 05104,
06904
PIONEER 03104
PRIMESTAR 08204, 08304
PROMAX 01404
PROSCAN 01204, 01504
RADIOLA 00704
RADIOSHACK
03504
RADIX 01304
RCA 00404, 01204, 01504,
03204
RFT 00704
SABRE 01404
SAGEM 02904, 04804, 05904
SAMSUNG 03804, 04604, 06004,
06204
SAT CONTROL
06404
SATSTATION 04204
SCHWAIGER 04704
SEEMANN 01304
SIEMENS 00604
SKY 03004, 03304, 05204,
12104, 12204, 12304
SKY HD 12404
SKY MASTER 07504, 07604, 07704,
07804, 07904, 08004
SKY+ (SKY Digital +)
08104
STARCHOICE 08204, 08304
SM ELECTRONIC
05404
SMART 08804, 08904, 09204,
09304, 09404, 09504,
10204, 10304, 10504,
10904, 11204, 11404,
11504
SONY 01704, 03004, 06704
STAR CHOICE 03504
STRONG 06404
TANTEC 01404
TECHNISAT 04404, 04504
TELESTAR 04504
THOMSON 01404, 03104, 03904,
06104
Tivo 08404
TOPFIELD 05504
TOSHIBA 02304, 02704, 06904
TPS 02904, 05904
ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704
UNIDEN 02004, 02204
UNIVERSUM 00604
VENTANA 00704
WISI 00604, 01304, 01404
XSAT 00104
ZEHNDER 04004
ZENITH 03304
52 En
Numerics
2-channel source surround decode ............................... 24
3Beam, beam mode ...................................................... 24
5.1ch beam mode .......................................................... 23
5.1-channel source 7.1-channel decode ........................ 24
5Beam, beam mode ...................................................... 23
5BeamPlus2, beam mode ............................................. 24
7.1ch beam mode .......................................................... 24
A
AC IN jack ..................................................................... 8
AC ON STANDBY, ADVANCED SETUP ................ 38
Adaptive DRC, Dynamic range control ....................... 34
Adaptive dynamic range control, Dynamic range control
34
Adjusting volume level automatically UniVolume ...... 28
ADVANCED SETUP .................................................. 37
Adventure. CINEMA DSP program ............................ 23
Attaching stands, installation ....................................... 10
Audio / video component connection ........................... 13
AUDIO DELAY, SOUND SET MENU ...................... 33
Audio delay, SOUND SET MENU .............................. 33
AUDIO IN jacks ............................................................. 8
Audio Sampling, input signal information ................... 29
AUDIO SELECT, HDMI setup ................................... 36
Audio select, HDMI setup ............................................ 36
AUTO DIMMER, Front panel display setup ............... 36
Auto dimmer, Front panel display setup ...................... 36
AUTO LIP SYNC, Audio delay .................................. 33
Auto Preset, option menu ............................................. 29
AUTO SETUP .............................................................. 15
AUTO SETUP, Error messages ................................... 18
Automatic lipsync, Audio delay ................................... 33
Automatic preset, option menu .................................... 29
AUX1/2, Audio delay .................................................. 33
AV button, Remote control ............................................ 9
AV key, controlling external component ..................... 39
B
BASS EXT indicator ...................................................... 7
BASS EXTENSION, SOUND SET MENU ................ 34
Bass extension, SOUND SET MENU ......................... 34
BASS OUT, Subwoofer settings .................................. 33
Bass out, Subwoofer settings ....................................... 33
Bass sound output redirection, Sound output ............... 35
BEAM ADJUSTMENT, MANUAL SETUP .............. 32
Beam adjustment, MANUAL SETUP ......................... 32
Beam mode, 5.1ch ........................................................ 23
Beam mode, 7.1ch ........................................................ 24
Blu-ray disc player connection ..................................... 12
C
cardboard microphone stand assemble ......................... 16
CENTER PRE OUT jack ............................................. 38
Center SP Size, Sound output ...................................... 35
Center speaker size for PRE OUT, Sound output ........ 35
CH key, controlling external component ..................... 39
CH keys, Remote control ............................................... 9
CHANNEL LEVEL, SOUND SET MENU ................ 34
Channel level, SOUND SET MENU ........................... 34
CINEMA DSP indicator ................................................. 7
CINEMA DSP program keys, Remote control .............. 9
CINEMA DSP programs .............................................. 22
Clear preset station, option menu ................................. 29
Clear Preset, option menu ............................................ 29
CODE SET key, controlling external component ........ 39
CODE SET key, Remote control ................................... 9
Concert Hall. CINEMA DSP program ......................... 23
Configuring input source settings ................................ 28
Connecting audio / video components ......................... 13
Connecting Blu-ray disc player .................................... 12
Connecting external components ................................. 12
Connecting FM antenna ............................................... 13
Connecting subwoofer .................................................. 14
Connecting TV ............................................................. 12
Connections ................................................................. 12
Controlling external component .................................. 39
Corner installation, placement ..................................... 11
CROSS OVER, Subwoofer settings ............................ 33
Crossover, Subwoofer settings .................................... 33
Cursor keys, controlling external component .............. 39
Cursor keys, Remote control ......................................... 9
Customizing this unit ................................................... 30
D
Decoder indicators ................................................... 7, 21
Decoder Mode, option menu ....................................... 29
Decoder mode, option menu ........................................ 29
DEMO MODE, ADVANCED SETUP ....................... 38
Demo mode, ADVANCED SETUP ............................ 38
DIGITAL IN jacks ......................................................... 8
Display language change ............................................. 15
DISPLAY MENU ........................................................ 36
Displaying input signal information ............................ 29
Displaying the Radio Data System information .......... 26
DISTANCE, Subwoofer settings ................................. 33
Distance, Subwoofer settings ....................................... 33
Dolby Digital Plus, glossary ........................................ 43
Dolby Digital Surround EX, glossary .......................... 43
Dolby Digital, glossary ................................................ 43
Dolby Pro Logic II, glossary ....................................... 43
Dolby Pro Logic IIx, glossary ..................................... 43
Dolby Surround, glossary ............................................ 43
Dolby TrueHD, glossary .............................................. 43
Dolby/DTS DRC, Dynamic range control ................... 34
Drama. CINEMA DSP program .................................. 23
DRC:Dynamic Range CTRL, SOUND SET MENU .. 34
DTS 96/24, glossary .................................................... 43
DTS Digital Surround, glossary .................................. 43
DTS Neo:6, glossary .................................................... 43
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, glossary ................. 43
DTS-HD Master Audio, glossary ................................ 43
Dynamic range control, SOUND SET MENU ............ 34
Dynamic range of Dolby Digitaland DTS signals,
Dynamic range control ............................................ 34
E
ENHANCER indicator .................................................. 7
ENTER key, controlling external component ............. 39
ENTER key, Remote control ......................................... 9
ENTERTAINMENT. CINEMA DSP program ........... 23
Entertainment. CINEMA DSP program ...................... 23
Error messages, AUTO SETUP .................................. 18
External amplifier using .............................................. 38
External component connection .................................. 12
External component control ......................................... 39
External component operation keys, controlling external
component ............................................................... 39
External component operation keys, Remote control .... 9
F
F.DISPLAY SETUP, DISPLAY MENU .................... 36
F.PANEL KEY, ADVANCED SETUP ...................... 37
FACTORY PRESET, ADVANCED SETUP .............. 38
Factory preset, ADVANCED SETUP ......................... 38
FM antenna connection ................................................ 13
FM ANTENNA jack ...................................................... 8
FM Mode, option menu ............................................... 29
FM receiving mode, option menu ................................ 29
FM tuner, troubleshooting ........................................... 41
FM tuning .................................................................... 25
Frequency tuning, FM tuning ...................................... 25
Front panel ..................................................................... 6
Front panel display .................................................... 6, 7
Front panel display setup, DISPLAY MENU ............. 36
Front panel input key, ADVANCED SETUP ............. 37
Front panel key, ADVANCED SETUP ....................... 37
FRONT PRE OUT jacks ............................................. 38
Front SP Size, Sound output ........................................ 35
Front speaker size for PRE OUT, Sound output .......... 35
G
Game. CINEMA DSP program .................................... 23
General, troubleshooting .............................................. 40
Group ID, Wireless setup ............................................. 36
H
HDMI control function ................................................ 28
HDMI CONTROL, INPUT MENU ............................. 36
HDMI control, INPUT MENU .................................... 36
HDMI indicator .............................................................. 7
HDMI jacks .................................................................... 8
HDMI SETUP, INPUT MENU ................................... 36
HDMI setup, INPUT MENU ....................................... 36
HDMI, Audio delay ..................................................... 33
HDMI, glossary ............................................................ 44
I
IMAGE LOCATION, MANUAL SETUP .................. 32
Image location, MANUAL SETUP ............................. 32
INFO key, Remote control ............................................. 9
INPUT ASSIGNMENT, INPUT MENU ..................... 35
Input assignment, INPUT MENU ................................ 35
Input channel indicators ........................................... 7, 22
INPUT key, Front panel ................................................. 6
INPUT MENU ............................................................. 35
INPUT RENAME, INPUT MENU .............................. 35
Input rename, INPUT MENU ...................................... 35
Input selector keys, Remote control ............................... 9
Input signal information display .................................. 29
Input source setting configuration ................................ 28
Installing batteries, remote control ............................... 14
IntelliBeam ................................................................... 15
INTELLIBEAM key, Remote control ........................... 9
INTELLIBEAM MIC jack ............................................. 6
iPod Interlock, Wireless setup ...................................... 36
iPod interlock, Wireless setup ...................................... 36
iPod, troubleshooting ................................................... 42
iPod/iPhone playback ................................................... 27
IR IN terminal ................................................................ 8
IR-OUT terminal ............................................................ 8
J
Jazz Club. CINEMA DSP program ............................. 23
L
LANGUAGE SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ................... 37
Language setup, DISPLAY MENU ............................. 37
LFE 0.1-channel, glossary ............................................ 44
LFE Level, Sound output ............................................. 35
LFE LEVEL, Subwoofer settings ................................ 33
Linear PCM, glossary ................................................... 44
Loading settings ........................................................... 19
Low-frequency effect level for PRE OUT, Sound output .
35
Low-frequency effect level, Subwoofer settings ......... 33
M
MANUAL SETUP ....................................................... 31
MAX VOLUME SET, ADVANCED SETUP ............. 37
Maximum volume setting, ADVANCED SETUP ....... 37
Mch Stereo. CINEMA DSP program ........................... 23
MEMORY PROTECT, ADVANCED SETUP ........... 38
Memory protect, ADVANCED SETUP ...................... 38
MENU key, controlling external component ............... 39
MENU key, Remote control .......................................... 9
MOVIE. CINEMA DSP program ................................ 23
Movie. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23
Multi-information display .............................................. 7
MUSIC ENHANCER, SOUND SET MENU .............. 34
Music Video. CINEMA DSP program ........................ 23
MUSIC. CINEMA DSP program ................................ 23
Index
53 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS
Music. CINEMA DSP program .................................. 23
MUTE key, Remote control .......................................... 9
Muting audio output .................................................... 21
N
Numeric keys, controlling external component .......... 39
Numeric keys, Remote control ...................................... 9
O
Operation range, remote control .................................. 14
OPTION key, Remote control ....................................... 9
OSD BACK COLOR, OSD setup ............................... 37
OSD background color, OSD setup ............................ 37
OSD language change ................................................. 15
OSD SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ................................ 37
OSD setup, DISPLAY MENU .................................... 37
OSD SHIFT, OSD setup ............................................. 37
OSD shift, OSD setup ................................................. 37
P
PANEL INP.KEY, ADVANCED SETUP .................. 37
Parallel installation, placement .................................... 11
PCM indicator ............................................................... 7
PCM, glossary ............................................................. 44
Playback ...................................................................... 21
Playing back iPod/iPhone ............................................ 27
Power key, Ffront panel ................................................ 6
Power key, Remote control ........................................... 9
Power LED .................................................................... 6
Power-on by remote control input keys, ADVANCED
SETUP .................................................................... 38
PRE OUT jacks ............................................................. 8
PRE OUT Volume, Sound output ............................... 35
PRE OUT volume, Sound output ................................ 35
Preset tuning, FM tuning ............................................. 25
R
R.INPUT POWER, ADVANCED SETUP ................. 38
Rack using, installation ............................................... 10
Radio Data System tuning ........................................... 26
Rear panel ...................................................................... 8
RECV, Wireless indicators ............................................ 7
Remote control .............................................................. 9
Remote control code list .............................................. 45
Remote control code resetting all ................................ 39
Remote control code setting ........................................ 39
Remote control preparation ......................................... 14
Remote control sensor ................................................... 6
Remote control, troubleshooting ................................. 41
Resetting all remote control code ................................ 39
Resolution, input signal information ........................... 29
RETURN key, controlling external component .......... 39
RETURN key, Remote control ..................................... 9
RS-232C terminal .......................................................... 8
S
Sampling frequency, input signal information ............ 29
Saving settings ............................................................. 19
Sci-Fi. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23
SET MENU ................................................................. 30
SET MENU operation ................................................. 31
Setting Loading ........................................................... 19
SETTING PARAMETERS, MANUAL SETUP ........ 31
Setting parameters, MANUAL SETUP ...................... 31
Setting remote control code ......................................... 39
Setting saving .............................................................. 19
SETUP key, Remote control ......................................... 9
SLEEP indicator ............................................................ 7
SLEEP key, Remote control .......................................... 9
Sleep timer ................................................................... 28
SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG, SOUND OUT MENU .
34
Sound beam output configuration, SOUND OUT MENU
34
SOUND OUT MENU ................................................. 34
SOUND OUT, SOUND OUT MENU ........................ 34
Sound output redirection, Sound output ...................... 35
Sound output, SOUND OUT MENU .......................... 34
SOUND SET MENU ................................................... 33
Specifications ............................................................... 44
Spectacle. CINEMA DSP program ............................. 23
Sports. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23
ST+3BeamPlus2, beam mode ...................................... 24
Stand attachment, installation ...................................... 10
STANDARD DIMMER, Front panel display setup .... 36
Standard dimmer, Front panel display setup ............... 36
Standby after AC on, ADVANCED SETUP ............... 38
STEREO key, Remote control ....................................... 9
Stereo+3Beam, beam mode ......................................... 23
Subwoofer connection ................................................. 14
SUBWOOFER jack ....................................................... 8
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack .................................... 38
SUBWOOFER SET, SOUND SET MENU ................ 33
Subwoofer settings, SOUND SET MENU .................. 33
SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI setup ................................ 36
Support audio, HDMI setup ......................................... 36
SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks ...................................... 38
SUR.DECODE key, Remote control ............................. 9
SURROUND key, Remote control ................................ 9
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ..................................... 38
System configurations .................................................. 37
SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal ................................ 8
System memory using .................................................. 19
T
Table top stand/floor stand using, installation ............. 10
Talk Show. CINEMA DSP program ........................... 23
TONE CONTROL, SOUND SET MENU .................. 33
Tone control, SOUND SET MENU ............................ 33
TOP MENU key, controlling external component ...... 39
TOP MENU key, Remote control .................................. 9
Transmission indicator, Remote control ........................ 9
TREBLE, Tone control ................................................ 33
Treble, Tone control .................................................... 33
TRNS, Wireless indicators ............................................ 7
Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40
Tuner indicators ............................................................. 7
Tuner operation keys, Remote control ........................... 9
TURN ON VOLUME, ADVANCED SETUP ............ 37
TV ................................................................................ 33
TV button, Remote control ............................................ 9
TV connection .............................................................. 12
TV INPUT key, controlling external component ........ 39
TV key, controlling external component ..................... 39
TV MUTE key, controlling external component ......... 39
TV operation keys, Remote control ............................... 9
TV VOL +/– key, controlling external component ...... 39
TV, Audio delay .......................................................... 33
U
UNIT SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ............................... 37
Unit setup, DISPLAY MENU ..................................... 37
UNIVOLUME indicator ................................................ 7
UNIVOLUME key, Remote control .............................. 9
V
VIDEO jacks .................................................................. 8
Video Signal In, input signal information ................... 29
VOLUME +/– keys, Front panel ................................... 6
VOLUME +/– keys, Remote control ............................. 9
Volume level at power-on, ADVANCED SETUP ...... 37
Volume level indicator ................................................... 7
Volume Trim, option menu ......................................... 29
Volume trim, option menu ........................................... 29
W
wall mount bracket using, installation ......................... 10
Wireless Function, Wireless setup ............................... 36
Wireless function, Wireless setup ................................ 36
Wireless indicators ......................................................... 7
WIRELESS SETUP, INPUT MENU .......................... 36
Wireless setup, INPUT MENU ................................... 36
X
x.v.Color, glossary ....................................................... 44
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
YC174B0/OMEN2

Documenttranscriptie

Digital Sound ProjectorTM Owner’s Manual English for Europe, Asia, Africa, Oceania, and Latin America The “ Corporation. ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of Yamaha Manufactured under license from Cambridge Mechatronics Ltd. Worldwide patents applied for. The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector™” are trademarks of Cambridge Mechatronics Ltd. The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. The “ ” and “UniVolume” are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a trademark. The “ ” and “AirWired” are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. iPod™, iPhone™ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. “Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. About this manual • Make sure you read precautions in “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet) carefully before using this unit. • This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the supplied owner’s manual for each component. • Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • An illustration of the remote control in the left pages of this manual indicates the keys to be used in two facing (left and right) pages. • This manual is produced prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority. 2 En INTRODUCTION CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Features........................................................................... 4 General operation flow .................................................. 5 Controls and functions................................................... 6 PREPARATION Installation .................................................................... 10 Connections................................................................... 12 Before connecting components ........................................12 Connecting external components .....................................12 Connecting a subwoofer...................................................13 Connecting the FM antenna .............................................14 Preparing the remote control ...................................... 14 Changing OSD language.............................................. 15 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)....................................... 15 SET MENU items............................................................ 30 Basic SET MENU operation............................................ 31 MANUAL SETUP........................................................... 31 SOUND SET MENU....................................................... 33 SOUND OUT MENU...................................................... 34 INPUT MENU................................................................. 35 DISPLAY MENU............................................................ 36 System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) ......... 37 Using an external amplifier ......................................... 38 Controlling external components ............................... 39 APPENDIX Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40 Glossary......................................................................... 43 Specifications ................................................................ 44 List of remote control codes ........................................ 45 Index .............................................................................. 52 PLAYBACK FEATURES Installing batteries in the remote control..........................14 Operation range of the remote control .............................14 Customizing this unit (SET MENU)........................... 30 PREPARATION Front panel .........................................................................6 Front panel display.............................................................7 Rear panel...........................................................................8 Remote control ...................................................................9 SETTINGS Installing the IntelliBeam microphone.............................15 Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ................................16 Using the system memory ............................................ 19 Saving settings .................................................................19 Loading settings ...............................................................19 PLAYBACK FEATURES Playback ........................................................................ 21 Playing back sources ........................................................21 Playing back TV sounds...................................................21 Playing back a player .......................................................21 Muting audio output.........................................................21 Decoder and input channel indicators ..............................21 Playback mode.............................................................. 22 SETTINGS Selecting surround or stereo playback .............................22 Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs..................................22 Changing the audio output method for surround playback........................................................................23 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ...............24 Playing back 5.1-channel sources in 7.1-channel surround ....................................................24 FM tuning ..................................................................... 25 Tuning into the desired FM station (Frequency tuning) .......................................................25 Registering FM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning).....25 Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only).....................................................26 Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 27 Useful features .............................................................. 28 APPENDIX Adjusting volume level automatically (UniVolume).......28 Using the HDMI™ control function ................................28 Using the sleep timer........................................................28 Configuring settings for each input source (Option menu) ..............................................................28 Displaying the input signal information...........................29 3 En INTRODUCTION Features Digital Sound Projector The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multichannel surround sound, thus eliminates the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional surround sound systems. This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo+3 Beam, 3 Beam for 5.1-channel audio, 5 Beam plus 2, Stereo + 3 Beam plus 2, 3 Beam for 7.1-channel audio) and 2-channel stereo playback. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI input x 4, HDMI output x 1 ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition video (including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDCP – Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability – Deep Color video signal transmission capability – “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability – High definition digital audio format signals capability – Multi-channel Linear PCM signal capability ◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external components ◆ Functional link which enables the remote control of your TV to control this unit (with an HDMI control-compatible TV) – Power mode switch capability (on/standby) – Volume adjustment capability – TV sounds reproduce device selection capability (this unit/TV) AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic optimization technology with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best match your listening environment. Cinema DSP This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed by Yamaha Electronics Corp. that lets you experience movies at home with all the original dramatic sound impact. UniVolume This unit employs the automatic volume adjustment function. You can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not increase suddenly when whenever the contents being broadcast change (due to commercials, etc.). Various digital audio decoders includes newly added HD audio decoder, and sound technologies ◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby digital Surround EX, Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Pro Logic II, Pro Logic IIx ◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, DTS, DTS-ES (discrete and matrix), DTS Neo: 6 ◆ Music Enhancer to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts such as the MP3 format ◆ Bass Extension to produce powerful bass sounds Sophisticated FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning Radio Data System (Europe model only) This unit employs the Radio Data System that is a data transmission system used by FM stations. 4 En Wireless connection (AirWired) ◆ Wireless connection with iPod/iPhone, using Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX-50TX/PDX-50BC) ◆ Wireless connection with subwoofer, using Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWK-W10) (not available in some countries) ◆ iPod/iPhone interlock feature to turn on/off this unit or switch the input source in conjunction with iPod/iPhone operations Versatile Remote Control The supplied remote control comes with preset remote control codes used to control external components connected to this unit. INTRODUCTION General operation flow 2 Run AUTO SETUP to optimize the beam and sound settings. “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” (page 15). 3 Play back a source. “Playback” (page 21). 4 Change the playback method (surround/stereo), CINEMA DSP and/or beam modes settings. “Playback mode” (page 22). 5 Configure this unit’s settings and/or set remote control codes. “Customizing this unit (SET MENU)” (page 30), “Controlling external components” (page 39). PLAYBACK FEATURES Install this unit and connect to other components. “Installation” (page 10), “Connections” (page 12). PREPARATION 1 SETTINGS APPENDIX 5 En Controls and functions Front panel 12 4 5 INPUT VOLUME 1 Remote control sensor Receives infrared signals from the remote control (page 14). 2 Power LED Lights up when the power is turned on (page 21). 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (page 7). 4 INPUT Press repeatedly to switch between input sources. 5 VOLUME +/– Controls the volume level of all audio channels. Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum) 6 En 3 6 7 INTELLIBEAM MIC 6 Power (p) key Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode (page 21). Note • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control or to search for HDMI signals. 7 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO SETUP (page 15). INTRODUCTION Front panel display 12 3 4 5 TRNS RECV 7 q DIGITAL PLUS q EX PCM q TRUE HD q PL x A 96 24 HD MSTR HI RES Neo:6 ES DSCRT MTRX SLEEP O UNIVOLUME ENHANCER BASS EXT 0 89 m ft dB B C VOL L C R SL SB SR EX1 LFE EX2 D 8 SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is set (page 28). 2 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program is selected (page 22). 9 Volume level indicator Displays the current volume level. 3 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input from the HDMI IN jack(s). 0 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (page 34). 5 Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) Show the current Radio Data System status (page 26). 6 Wireless indicators TRNS Lights up when a wireless connection is established between the Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWKW10) and this unit (page 13). RECV Lights up when a wireless connection is established between the Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX50TX) and this unit (page 27). PLAYBACK FEATURES 1 UNIVOLUME indicator Lights up when the UniVolume function is turned on (page 28). 4 Tuner indicators Light up when this unit is tuned into an FM station (page 25). PREPARATION TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS PTY RT CT 6 A BASS EXT indicator Lights up when the bass extension mode is turned on (page 34). B PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. C Multi-information display Shows information with alphanumeric characters when you adjust the parameters of this unit. Current input source and audio output method are displayed when this unit is turned on. D Input channel indicators The channel component of the current input signal is displayed (page 21). 7 Decoder indicators Light up when the corresponding decoder operates (page 21). SETTINGS APPENDIX 7 En Rear panel A B 1 OUT HDMI IN 1 FRONT SURROUND IR-OUT SUR. BACK PRE OUT IN 2 IN 3 OUT HDMI 0 IN 1 IN 4 IN 2 COMPONENT PR PB VIDEO Y IN VIDEO IN 3 SUB WOOFER VIDEO OUT L L R R AUX 1 TV AUDIO IN SYSTEM CONNECTOR AUX 2 AUX 1 DIGITAL IN IN 4 TV IR IN RS-232C L CENTER R R R SUB WOOFER FRONT L SURROUND L SUR. BACK IR-OUT AC IN PRE OUT 3 FM ANTENNA COMPONENT 2 IN 45 6 7 8 9 SUB WOOFER SYSTEM CONNECTOR OUT VIDEO AUX 1 TV AUDIO IN AUX 2 AUX 1 DIGITAL IN TV IR IN RS-232C Note • The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. 1 HDMI jacks Connect your HDMI components (page 12). 7 IR IN terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only. 2 FM ANTENNA jack Connect the FM antenna (page 14). 8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal Use to connect a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal to this unit (page 13). 3 VIDEO jacks Connect to the video jacks of your external components (page 12). 4 SUBWOOFER jack Connect your subwoofer (page 13). 5 AUDIO IN jacks Connect to the analog audio output jacks of your external components (page 12). 6 DIGITAL IN jacks Connect to the digital audio output jacks of your external components (page 12). 8 En 9 RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only. 0 AC IN Connect the supplied power cable (page 12). A IR-OUT terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only. B PRE OUT jacks Connect your external amplifier (page 38). INTRODUCTION Remote control A AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE MUSIC ENTER TAINMENT E CINEMA DSP program keys Select the CINEMA DSP programs (page 22). C F SURROUND/STEREO Switches between surround and stereo playback (page 22). D OFF E CINEMA DSP SURROUND B STEREO F ENTER TOP MENU MENU SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE INPUT H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP H MENU Displays the menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD (page 39). I OPTION Displays the option menu (page 28). The remote control turns to setting mode (ISETUP lights up). J K I RETURN Returns to the previous menu screen (page 31). L J CH / Changes the channels of your TV/recorder (page 39). M K VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (page 21). N K MUTE Mutes the sound. (page 21). O L TV operation keys Use to control your TV (page 39). P M UNIVOLUME Turns on or off the UniVolume function (page 28). MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM H TOP MENU Displays the top menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD (page 39). I SETUP Displays the SETUP menu (page 30). Press and hold to directly enter the LANGUAGE SETUP menu (page 15). Lights up when the remote control is turned into the setting mode of the main unit. I UNIVOLUME G Cursor ( / / / ) keys, ENTER Select and adjust menu items. Q R • When operating the keys located on the slide cover (INFO, SLEEP, etc.), close the slide cover completely before operation. A Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. B TV (p) Turns on the power of your TV or set it to the standby mode (page 39). C Power (p) key Turns on the power of this unit or set it to the standby mode (page 21). M INTELLIBEAM Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (page 16). The remote control turns to setting mode (ISETUP lights up). N Numeric keys Use to enter numbers. O CODE SET Sets remote control codes for external component operations (page 39). P Tuner / external component operation keys Use to select or preset an FM station or control playback of your external components (pages 25 and 39). Q SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (page 28). R INFO Displays information about signals currently input to this unit (page 29). Select the desired Radio Data System display mode (Europe model only) (page 26). APPENDIX B AV (p) Turns on the power of the selected component or set it to the standby mode (page 39). M SUR.DECODE Selects a decoder for surround playback (page 24). The remote control turns to setting mode (ISETUP lights up). SETTINGS Note PLAYBACK FEATURES OPTION G PREPARATION TV D Input selector keys Use to select an input source (page 21). An input source key currently selected lights up when the remote control is operated. 9 En PREPARATION Installation This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a wall mount bracket, a rack, a table top stand or a floor stand. To achieve desired surround sound effects, install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams (page 11). Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (page 12) should be done before installation. ■ Using a wall mount bracket Notes • Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat can escape. We recommend installing this unit using a wall mount bracket, a rack, a table top stand or a floor stand. • Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children. • When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly above your TV. • If the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we recommend moving this unit away from your TV. You can use the optional wall mount bracket (such as SPM-K30) to mount this unit on the wall in your listening room. Attachment of the wall mount bracket: refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the wall mount bracket. Wall mount bracket ■ Attach the stands Attach the supplied stands to this unit as shown below. Make sure that you attach the left and right stands correctly. These stands are unnecessary if you use the optional wall mount bracket. This unit Right stand (supplied) TV Dimensions when using SPM-K30 YSP-5100 235 355 355 235 26 Left stand (supplied) 92 112 24- 7x22 74 4- 7 Screws (for stands, supplied) 730 SPM-K30 (Option) Note 150 355 355 150 26 • Depending on a rack, table top stand, or floor stand, the stands may not be necessary. 92 112 24- 7x22 74 ■ Using a rack You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a commercially available rack. It should be large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around this unit and strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV. 4- 7 (mm) 730 YSP-4100 When this unit is installed above your TV TV 18 107 (mm) This unit ■ Using a table top stand or a floor stand You can mount both your TV and this unit on a commercially available table top stand or floor stand. When this unit is installed under your TV 10 En INTRODUCTION ■ Ideal installation condition : Object such as furniture Parallel installation (with 5 Beam) Corner installation (with Stereo+3Beam) 40° to 50° PREPARATION ■ For better listening environment Example 1 Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible. PLAYBACK FEATURES Example 2 Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls. SETTINGS Example 3 Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible. APPENDIX 11 En Connections Component video pin cable Before connecting components ■ Cables used for connections The symbols on the left of cable names (such as , , and ) correspond with the symbols described in “Connecting your TV and Blu-ray disc player” (page 12) and “Connecting audio video components” (page 13). ■ Information on HDMI An HDMI cable can transmit both audio and video signals at the same time. If your TV and other components have HDMI jacks, use HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections. See also: “Using the HDMI control function” (page 28), “INPUT MENU” (page 35) For audio and video HDMI cable Input source For audio Audio pin cable (supplied) Audio signal type Blu-ray disc HD DVD Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM DVD audio 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM y Optical cable (supplied) • This unit automatically converts input video signals and outputs the signals from the HDMI OUT jack. • The HDMI of this unit supports High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP), • We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (16 ft) with the HDMI logo printed on it. Digital audio pin cable (supplied) ■ Priority order for audio input signals When digital and analog audio signals are simultaneously input from a single source component, this unit plays back digital audio signals by priority. For example, if audio signals are input to the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) and AUDIO IN (AUX 1) jacks simultaneously, this unit plays back audio signals input to the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack when “AUX1” is selected as the input source. For video Video pin cable (supplied) Connecting external components Connect external components (TV, Blu-ray disc player, etc.) to this unit. Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. ■ Connecting your TV and Blu-ray disc player The following connection example shows a way to connect your TV and Blu-ray disc player by using the HDMI jacks. When you connect them by using the other jacks, refer to “Connecting audio and video components” (page 13). The symbols beside the cables correspond with the symbols described in “Cables used for connections” (page 12). Blu-ray disc player TV OUT HDMI output HDMI IN 1 1. Pull out the cap (if attached) Optical digital output HDMI input IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 2. Check the direction AUX 2 AUX 1 TV Power cable DIGITAL IN to AC wall outlet 12 En Determine the connection types depending on the jacks available on this unit and your external components. The symbols in the following table correspond with the symbols described in “Cables used for connections” (page 12). HDMI IN 1 IN 2 COMPONENT PR PB VIDEO Y IN VIDEO VIDEO IN/OUT jacks IN 3 SUB WOOFER L L VIDEO R R OUT AUX 1 TV SYSTEM CONNECTOR AUX 2 AUDIO IN AUX 1 DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN IN 4 TV IR IN RS-232C DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN jacks DIGITAL IN jacks Jacks to use External component Signal type On external component TV PREPARATION VIDEO On this unit HDMI IN jacks Cable to use Input selection key Composite video input VIDEO OUT Audio Analog audio output AUDIO IN (TV) TV External component with HDMI output Audio/video HDMI output HDMI IN 1-4 HDMI1-4 External component with component video output Audio Coaxial digital output DIGITAL IN (AUX 2) AUX2 Video Component video output VIDEO IN (COMPONENT) External component with composite video output Audio Optical digital output DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) Analog audio output AUDIO IN (AUX 1) Composite video output VIDEO IN (VIDEO) PLAYBACK FEATURES Video Video INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting audio and video components AUX1 y • Video signals input from the VIDEO IN (VIDEO) jack can be output not only to the VIDEO OUT jack but also the HDMI OUT jack. Video signals input from the VIDEO IN (COMPONENT) jacks are output to the HDMI OUT jack. Connecting a subwoofer Wireline connection Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit. SYSTEM CONNECTOR OUT AUX 1 TV AUDIO IN AUX 2 AUX 1 DIGITAL IN TV IR IN SETTINGS SUB WOOFER Wireless connection You can make a wireless connection of your subwoofer by using the Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWK-W10). About SWK-W10, refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet). See also: “WIRELESS SETUP” (page 36) RS-232C INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC Subwoofer SWK-W10 Monaural input System connector y • For proper transmission, you need to set the group IDs of this unit and SWK-W10 to the same value. For the Group ID settings, refer to “Group ID” (page 36) and “Safety and Accessory Information (separate booklet)”. • If the subwoofer is connected by using a system type connection, changing the power mode of this unit controls the power mode of the subwoofer (Yamaha subwoofer). APPENDIX y Note • Be sure to use the product only in the country in where it was purchased. 13 En Connecting the FM antenna Connect the supplied FM antenna or your antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit. Antenna TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE UNIVOLUME FM ANTENNA G ENTER INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT I Preparing the remote control Note • Before installing batteries or using the remote control, make sure that you read precautions on the remote control and batteries in “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet). CODE SET Installing batteries in the remote control TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY Operation range of the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit during operation. SLEEP Pull and hold INPUT Within 6m (20ft) GENTER G / ISETUP 14 En 1 Pull and hold the tab on the battery cover and then open the cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (R03P, UM4, AAA) into the battery compartment. Make sure you insert the batteries according to the polarity markings (+/–). 3 Close the battery cover. 30° 30° VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC INTRODUCTION Changing OSD language You can select an OSD language among English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch and Russian. Before operating the following steps, select this unit as the video input on your TV. 1 3)LANGUAGE SETUP . ENGLISH DEUTSCH Francais ESPANOL ITALIANO NEDERLANDS 2 Press G / to select the desired language and then press GENTER. Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish), ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch), Русский (Russian) Initial setting: ENGLISH (English) 3 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter To exit from the menu, press ISETUP. Changing OSD language AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using the system memory PREPARATION Press and hold ISETUP until the “LANGUAGE SETUP” menu appears on your TV. AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) PLAYBACK FEATURES This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams off the walls of your listening room and by broadening the cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit. Notes • After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. • The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep the IntelliBeam microphone away from direct sunlight. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone on top of this unit. • You cannot use the AUTO SETUP when “PREOUT” is selected in “SOUND OUT” (page 35). • You cannot run the AUTO SETUP while playing back the iPod/iPhone by using PDX-50TX. To run the AUTO SETUP, stop playback and then disconnect the iPod/iPhone from PDX-50TX. About PDX-50TX, refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet). Installing the IntelliBeam microphone Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and place it in a proper location. 1 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. y • Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated. IntelliBeam microphone Upper limit Center height of this unit Within 1 m (3.3 ft) INPUT VOLUME Within 1 m (3.3 ft) SETTINGS Cardboard microphone stand 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more Listening position Lower limit INTELLIBEAM MIC INTELLIBEAM MIC 2 APPENDIX Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat level surface at your normal listening position. Place the IntelliBeam microphone on the extended center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from it. Also, make sure place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. Center line Cardboard microphone stand IntelliBeam microphone 15 En ■ Assembling the supplied cardboard microphone stand 1 TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC 2 Remove “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY” CINEMA DSP STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME I 3 TV Fit in Place horizontally 4 TV MUTE UNIVOLUME INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT M Notes 5 PRESET INFO MEMORY (Sound optimization only) Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. You must optimize the beam angle with “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” before starting “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY”. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you have opened or closed the curtains in your listening room before using this unit • If you have manually set the beam angle. This menu takes about three minutes. • It is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. • Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. For accurate measurement, turn off air conditioner or other devices that make noises. • To achieve the best results possible, vacate your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound beams. • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection. 2. Run “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY”. 3. Close the curtains. 4. Run “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY”. CODE SET TUNING (Beam optimization only) Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. This menu takes about one minute. OFF Fit in SURROUND “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” Run through SLEEP y • If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover frequency controls is connected to this unit, turn it on, set the volume to about half way and then set the crossover frequency to the maximum as shown below. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER HIGH CUT MIN y • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press IRETURN. 1 Press ISETUP. The remote control keys to be used and available operations in each step are displayed at the bottom of the screen. MAX Subwoofer SET MENU Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) p You can select one of the following AUTO SETUP types depending on your purpose. p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SOUND SET MENU ;SOUND OUT MENU ;INPUT MENU ;DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ” GENTER G / IRETURN ISETUP MINTELLIBEAM 16 En (Beam optimization and sound optimization) Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you make settings for the first time • If the unit has been relocated • If your listening room has been restructured • If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.) have been rearranged This menu takes about three minutes. y • You can also start the “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ” procedure simply by holding down MINTELLIBEAM for more than two seconds. In this case, proceed to step 4. y Press G / to select “AUTO SETUP” and then press GENTER. B)AUTO SETUP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press G / to select “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ”, “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” or “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY” and then press GENTER. 6 Press GENTER to confirm the results. The menu screen disappears in two seconds. Changing OSD language AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using the system memory PREPARATION • If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed, refer to “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” (page 18), press IRETURN, and then run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • If “SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit and turned on, check the connection and then increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • Depending on the environment of your listening room, the beam angles of front right and left and surround left and right may be set to the same value even if “BEAM MODE :5 BEAM” is displayed as a result. 1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ 2)BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY 3)SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY 3 INTRODUCTION 2 AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel Prepare to leave the room. The best setting may not be done if you are in the room. Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing GENTER in step 5. y PLAYBACK FEATURES 4 AUTO SETUP COMPLETE Please remove the MIC from the unit and the listening position. y • If you do not want to reflect the results, press IRETURN. 7 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. • Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes. • To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started, press IRETURN. INPUT 5 VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC Press GENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure and then leave the room within 10 seconds. AUTO SETUP START The measurement results are stored in the internal memory of this unit until you run the AUTO SETUP procedure again or configure the settings manually. Will begin in 10sec Please leave the room *-------[RETURN]:Cancel SETTINGS The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO SETUP procedure. If an error occurs, an error buzzer sounds and an error message is displayed. For details on error messages, see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” (page 18). If the AUTO SETUP procedure is complete, this unit rings the chimes. XXXXXXXXSHOW RESULTXXXXXXXXXX MEASUREMENT COMPLETE BEAM MODE :5Beam/Plus2 SUBWOOFER :YES APPENDIX [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. 17 En ■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 iPod FM HDMI 4 MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC If an error message is displayed on your TV, check the error message list to solve the problem and then follow the procedure below. [ERROR E-1]: Press GENTER to run the AUTO SETUP procedure again or IRETURN to cancel the operation Other errors: Press IRETURN to cancel the operation and then run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. Note OFF If the problem is difficult to be solved, configure the settings manually in “MANUAL SETUP” (page 31). CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE UNIVOLUME INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT I Error message Cause Remedy See page ERROR E-1 Please test in quieter environment. There is too much unwanted noise in your listening room. Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. You may want to choose certain hours during the day when there is not much noise coming from outside. — ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone is not connected to this unit or disconnected during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit firmly. 15 ERROR E-3 Unexpected control is detected. Please re-try. Some other operations were performed on this unit while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Do not perform any other operations while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. — ERROR E-4 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set in front of the unit and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in front of this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed in front of this unit. 15 ERROR E-5 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in the right distance from this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height of this unit. 15 ERROR E-6 Volume level is lower than expected. Please check MIC position/connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone cannot collect the sound produced by this unit because the sound output level is too low. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and placed in a proper location. If the problem persists, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha service center for assistance. 15 ERROR E-7 Unexpected error happened. Please re-try. An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure. — CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY GENTER G / IRETURN ISETUP 18 En SLEEP INTRODUCTION Using the system memory You can save the current beam and sound settings in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of the sound beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed. y Saving settings 1 5 Press ISETUP. 2)MEMORY SAVE MEMORY1 Saving... p p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SOUND SET MENU ;SOUND OUT MENU ;INPUT MENU ;DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PLAYBACK FEATURES Press GENTER. Loading settings A)MEMORY 1 Press ISETUP. 1)LOAD 2)SAVE SET MENU p p p Press G / to select “SAVE” and then press GENTER. 2 p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SOUND SET MENU ;SOUND OUT MENU ;INPUT MENU ;DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 3 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using the system memory SET MENU 2 Press GENTER. The current beam and sound settings are saved to the selected memory number. Changing OSD language PREPARATION • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. While the curtains are open, run “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ” (page 16) and then save the settings to “MEMORY1”. 2. While the curtains are closed, run “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY” (page 16) and then save the settings to “MEMORY2”. Press GENTER. 2)MEMORY SAVE A)MEMORY a)MEMORY1 b)MEMORY2 c)MEMORY3 1)LOAD 2)SAVE p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SETTINGS 4 Press G / to select the desired memory number and then press GENTER. 2)MEMORY SAVE 3 Press GENTER again. 1)MEMORY LOAD a)MEMORY1 b)MEMORY2 c)MEMORY3 MEMORY1 Save Now? p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p [ENTER]:Enter p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter APPENDIX y • If system settings are already stored in the selected memory number, this unit overwrites the old settings. 19 En 4 C TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC Press G / to select the memory number to be loaded and then press GENTER. D 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Load Now ? OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME K TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME 5 Press GENTER. The beam and sound settings saved in the selected memory number are loaded. MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP CPower DAUX1/2 DHDMI1 DHDMI1-4 DInput selector keys DTV GENTER G Push [ENTER] to Load MENU / KMUTE KVOLUME +/– 20 En 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Loading... INTRODUCTION PLAYBACK FEATURES Playback Playing back sources 1 Press CPower (p) key to turn on this unit. 2 Turn on external components (TV, Blu-ray disc player, etc.) connected to this unit. 3 Press one of the DInput selector keys to select an external component as an input source. Input source name y • You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display (page 35). 4 5 Start playback of the external component that you have selected as the input source, or select a radio station on the tuner. • FM tuning (page 25) • Playing back iPod/iPhone (page 27) Press KVOLUME +/– to adjust the volume. Volume Volume 40 6 Press CPower (p) key to turn this unit to the standby mode. 1 Select the desired TV channel. 2 Press DTV to select the TV as the input source. 3 Mute the sound output on the TV. 2 Press DHDMI1-4 or DAUX1/2 to select the player as the input source. For example, if the player is connected to the HDMI IN 1 jack of this unit, press DHDMI1. 3 Start playback of the player. 4 Mute the sound output on the TV. AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using the system memory Playback y • If your player supports the HD audio, check whether the audio output setting on the player is set to the value which supports HD audio output (“Auto”, “Bitstream”, etc.). • If your player does not support the HD audio, check whether the audio output setting on the player is set to multi-channel linear PCM. • If your player is connected to this unit through the digital connection, check whether the audio output setting on the player is set to digital output (“Bitstream”, “Dolby Digital”, “DTS”, etc.). • To enhance the surround sound effect, set the audio setting of your player to the multi-channel audio mode. • You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the digital signals being input from the player through the digital Playback mode FM tuning Playing back iPod™ Useful features connection (HDMI, optical or coaxial). The DIGITAL indicator lights up when this unit detects the digital audio signal input. Muting audio output 1 Press KMUTE to mute the audio output. 2 Press KMUTE again to resume audio output. Decoder and input channel indicators SETTINGS Playing back TV sounds Select the player as the video input on the TV. PLAYBACK FEATURES HDMI1 1 Changing OSD language PREPARATION This section describes how to playback source input from your external components. For details on your external components, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component. Playing back a player ■ Decoder indicators Depending on the input source and the selected decoder, the indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: APPENDIX 21 En Status When PCM signals are being input TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod MOVIE OFF PCM E y • You can select an audio signal to be played back (Auto or DTS) In “Decoder Mode” (page 29). ■ Input channel indicators When Dolby TrueHD signals are being input FM ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC Indicator Center Front L When Dolby Digital Plus signals are being input Surround L CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME F MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET I Extra 1 When Dolby Digital signals are being input DIGITAL When Dolby Pro Logic is selected as the surround decoder PL When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected as the surround decoder PL PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP C R Front R SL SB SR Surround R EX1 LFE EX2 Extra 2 Depending on the channel component of the current digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: Input signal Indicator 2-channel stereo When DTS HD Master Audio signals are being input + HD + MSTR When DTS HD High Resolution signals are being input + HD + HI RES When DTS 96/24 signals are being input L LFE When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is selected as the surround decoder 5.1-channel When DTS digital signals are being input TUNING Surround back 6.1-channel + 7.1-channel When DTS ES discrete is selected as the surround decoder + ES + DSCRT When DTS ES matrix is selected as the surround decoder + ES + MTRX When DTS Neo:6 is selected as the surround decoder + Neo:6 y • Extra (EX1/EX2) indicators light up when 7.1-channnel signals recorded in a Blu-lay disc (etc.) are being input. Normally, surround back channel signals are recorded in the extra channels. This may vary depending on the disc. Playback mode You can select the playback method (surround or stereo), desired CINEMA DSP program and decoder to enjoy playback of the input source. Selecting surround or stereo playback Use to select the playback method (surround or stereo). See also: “ Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs” (page 22), “Changing the audio output method for surround playback” (page 23). Press FSURROUND or FSTEREO. You can enjoy high realistic sensation with surround playback and hi-fi sound with stereo playback. ECINEMA DSP y EOFF • Normal sounds (not sound beams) are output from the front right and front left channels. When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except those from the front right and left channels are mixed down and output from the front right and left channels. • When the stereo playback is selected, CINEMA DSP (page 22) and the decoder (page 24) become ineffective. FSTEREO FSURROUND GENTER G G / / G ISETUP 22 En Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs This unit is equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing) chip containing several sound field programs used to enhance your playback experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments of famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y • When you enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs, press F SURROUND to select the surround playback, and then follow the steps below. • The CINEMA DSP programs are not available in the following conditions. – Stereo playback is selected. – HD audio signals are being played back. – Audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz are being played back. – Audio signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks. Press the desired ECINEMA DSP key. The CINEMA DSP category name appears in the front panel display and the CINEMA DSP indicator (page 7) lights up. 2 While the category name is displayed, press the ECINEMA DSP key repeatedly. Each time you press the key, program switches. ■ Movie (MOVIE) Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialogs and special sound effects of the latest science fiction films and lets you feel a broad and expansive cinematic space. Adventure This program reproduces the thrilling environment of the latest action films and lets you feel the dynamic and excitement of fast-moving scenes. Changing the audio output method for surround playback You can set the number of beam output channels and audio output method. 1 Press ISETUP. The “SET MENU” screen appears on the TV. 2 Use G / and GENTER to select “SOUND OUT MENU”- “SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG” - “CHANNEL OUT”. 3 Press G / to select the number of output channels. Choices: 5.1ch, 7.1ch Initial setting: 7.1ch ■ Music (MUSIC) Music Video This program produces a vibrant environment and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. 4 Press G Concert Hall This program creates a rich surround effect of a large round concert hall with a great deal of presence, emphasizing the extension of sounds, and lets you feel as if you are seated close to the center of the stage. 5 Press G to select the desired audio output method. 6 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP. Jazz Club This program recreates the acoustic environment of “The Bottom Line”, a famous jazz club in New York once and lets you feel as if you are seated right in front of the stage. Playback Playback mode FM tuning Playing back iPod™ to select “BEAM MODE”. PLAYBACK FEATURES Spectacle This program reproduces the wide and grand environment and lets you have added impressions on spectacular scenes with strong visual impacts. Mch Stereo This program downmixes multi-channel source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers and produces stereo sounds in wide range. It is ideal for background music at parties, etc. PREPARATION y • To turn off the CINEMA DSP program, press EOFF. Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It utilizes the sound field effects for movies to represent the depth and spatial feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. INTRODUCTION 1 Useful features ■ Beam modes for “5.1ch” 5 Beam ■ Entertainment (ENTERTAINMENT) Talk Show This program reproduces excitement of live talk shows. It enhances the ambience of gaiety while keeping the conversations at a comfortable volume. Outputs sound beams from the front right and left, center, and surround right and left channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when you watch 5.1-channel audio discs. Stereo+3Beam APPENDIX Drama This program stables reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies, and offers an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words. SETTINGS Sports This program reproduces the energetic environment of live sports broadcasting, converging a commentator’s voice on the center and broadening the overall atmosphere of the stadium, and lets you feel as if you are seated at an actual stadium or a ball park. Outputs normal sound from the front right and left channels and sound beams from the center and surround right and left channels. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. 23 En 3 Beam TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC OFF y STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 7.1-channel or 5.1-channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound effects by switching the decoder. D CINEMA DSP SURROUND I Outputs sound beams from the front right and left and center channels. For playback of multi-channel sources, surround right and left channel sources are mixed into the front right and left channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall. ■ Beam modes for “7.1ch” 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT M MEMORY 2ch → 5ch Recommended source Decoder Pro Logic (Dolby Pro Logic) N P INFO Press MSUR.DECODE repeatedly to switch between decoders. 5Beam Plus2 CODE SET PRESET • The decoders are available only when surround playback (page 22) is selected. • Available decoders vary depending on the “CHANNEL OUT” setting (page 23). MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM TUNING Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound SLEEP Outputs sound beams from the front right and left, center, and surround back right and left channels. Surround right and left channel sources are mixed into the front right and left and surround back right and left channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when you watch 7.1-channel audio discs. ST+3BeamPlus2 — All sources PLII (Dolby Pro Logic II) Movie Music Game Movies Music Games Neo:6 (DTS Neo:6) Cinema Music Movies Music 2ch → 7ch Recommended source Decoder PLIIx (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) Movie Music Game Movies Music Games Neo:6 (DTS Neo:6) Cinema Music Movies Music Playing back 5.1-channel sources in 7.1-channel surround Outputs normal sound from the front right and left channels and sound beams from the center and surround back right and left channels. Surround right and left channel sounds are output by using front right and left channel sound and surround back right and left sound beams. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. This unit decodes 5.1-channel sources and then playback them in up to 7.1-channel surround. One of the following decoders is automatically selected depending on the input signals. Set “CHANNEL OUT” to “7.1ch” (page 23). 5.1ch input source Decoder PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie/ Music DTS ES matrix DRADIO DTS Digital, DTS ES matrix, DTS HD Master Audio, DTS HD High Resolution Audio GENTER DTS ES discrete DTS ES discrete 3 Beam G / y IOPTION IRETURN MSUR.DECODE NNumeric keys PTUNING PMEMORY 24 En / Outputs sound beams from the front right and left and center channels. For playback of multi-channel sources, surround right and left and surround back right and left channel sources are mixed into the front right and left channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall. • Press MSUR.DECODE to switch between Dolby Pro Logic Movie and Music. To switch to the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder, select “PLIIxMusic”. To switch to the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder, select one of the decoders other than “PLIIxMusic”. INTRODUCTION FM tuning The FM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. Note • Frequency tuning mode You can tune into a desired FM station by searching or specifying its frequency. • Preset tuning mode You can preset the frequencies of FM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune into. y • The reception is noisy and the sound is hard to listen, switch to monaural mode to get better reception. In the option menu, select “Mono” in “FM Mode” (page 29). Note Adjust the FM antenna connected to this unit for the best reception. Tuning into the desired FM station (Frequency tuning) 1 Note • If you select “FM” with INPUT on the front panel, press DFM on the remote control prior to step 2 so that you can operate the procedures from step 2. 2 Press PTUNING / to specify the frequency. The TUNED indicator on the front panel display lights up when the tuner is tuned into a station. The STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being broadcasted is in stereo. See also: “FM Mode” (page 29) Registering FM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning) Playback You can register up to 40 FM stations automatically or manually. ■ Registering stations automatically Playback mode The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 stations. FM tuning Note • Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by automatic station registration. 1 Press DFM to select the FM station as the input source. 2 Press IOPTION. The option menu (page 28) appears on the front panel display. 3 Press G / to select “Auto Preset” and then press GENTER. Lights up Playing back iPod™ PLAYBACK FEATURES Press DFM to select the FM station as the input source. PREPARATION • When you press NNumeric keys during preset tuning, a preset number is selected. Set the tuner to the frequency tuning mode using PTUNING / prior to the operation. • You do not need to enter zero if it comes at the end of a decimal number. For example, enter “889” for “88.90 MHz” or “94” for “94.00 MHz”. Useful features TUNED STEREO XXXFMX88.90MHz 3.Auto Preset The frequency changes in the following manner according to how you press PTUNING / . This unit starts to preset FM radio stations in 5 seconds. When you press the key more than 1 second The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is detectable around the current frequency. This is effective when the tuner can receive strong signals without any interference. Once the search starts, release the key. When you keep holding the key, the search continues even when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to tune in to a specific station. To directly specify the frequency, use NNumeric keys to enter the frequency of the station. P01:FM 87.50MHz Preset number Frequency y • You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by pressing G / after pressing GENTER. • To cancel the operation, press IRETURN. If auto preset is complete, “Preset Complete” appears. 4 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION. ■ Registering stations manually APPENDIX 3 SETTINGS When you press and release the key The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps. Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong signals and stations are skipped during the search. AUTO MEMORY You can manually register FM stations with weak signals. 1 Tune into the desired FM station. 2 Press PMEMORY. 25 En “Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display, followed soon by the preset number to which the station will be registered. 4 Press G / to select a preset station to be cleared, and then press GENTER. The selected preset station is cleared. If the operation is completed, “Cleared” appears. To clear the multiple preset stations, repeat step 4. 5 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION. y TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC D OFF 3 CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU • By holding down PMEMORY for more than 2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically register the selected station to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME I Press PPRESET / to select the preset number to which the station will be registered. When you select a preset number to which no station is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a preset number to which any station has been already registered, the frequency of the station is displayed. K TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME P02:Empty SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT Preset number N y • You can also specify a preset number using the NNumeric keys. CODE SET P TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. MEMORY MUTE 1 Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only) 4 SLEEP Press PMEMORY. When registration is complete, the front panel display returns to the original state. y R • To cancel registration, press IRETURN or leave this unit without any operations for about 30 seconds. ■ Calling a preset station (Preset tuning) You can call preset stations registered automatically or manually. Press PPRESET preset number. / to select the desired Notes • You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired station manually (page 25). • In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. 1 y • Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped. • “No Presets” is displayed if no stations are registered. • You can directly select a preset number by pressing the NNumeric keys while calling a preset station. • When you press NNumeric keys during normal frequency tuning, a frequency is entered. Set the tuner to the preset tuning mode using PTUNING / prior to the operation. ■ Clearing preset stations Use to clear the preset FM stations. 1 DFM 2 DiPod GENTER G / 3 IOPTION IRETURN KVOLUME +/– Press IOPTION. The option menu (page 28) appears on the front panel display. Press G / to select “Clear Preset” and then press GENTER. A preset station is displayed. C01:FM 92.50MHz PMEMORY PTUNING RINFO 26 En Note The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station broadcasts the PS data. 2 Press RINFO repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. Press DFM to select the FM station as the input source. NNumeric keys PPRESET Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (page 25). / Preset station / y • To cancel the clearing operation, press IRETURN. PS Decoder PTY RT CT Frequency • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program. • Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data System program. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program. • Select “CT” to display the current time. Note In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). INTRODUCTION Program type Descriptions News Current Affairs Current Affairs Information Information Sport Sport Education Education Drama Drama Cultures Cultures Science Science Varied Speech Varied Speech Pop Music Pop Music Rock Music Rock Music Easy Listening Easy Listening Music Light Classics Light Classical Music Serious Classic Serious Classical Music Other Music Other Music PREPARATION News Playback Playback mode Playing back iPod™ Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ By using the Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX50TX/PDX-50BC), you can use the iPod/iPhone as a remote control and enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone on this unit. About PDX-50TX/PDX-50BC, refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet). See also: “iPod Interlock” (page 36) Connect your iPod/iPhone and PDX-50TX, and then start playback. y • This unit supports the following iPod/iPhone models. – iPod 5th generation – iPod classic – iPod touch – iPod nano – iPhone – iPhone 3G Notes VOLUME Useful features INTELLIBEAM MIC MENU y • When you start playback of your iPod/iPhone, this unit automatically operates as follows. – When this unit is on, this unit selects “iPod” as the input source. – When this unit is in the standby mode, this unit turns on and selects “iPod” as the input source. • You can also select the input source with DiPod. • To adjust the volume level, use the volume control on the iPod/iPhone or KVOLUME +/– on this unit. • This unit automatically turns to the standby mode in the following conditions. – The iPod/iPhone is disconnected from PDX-50TX. – The iPod/iPhone is turned into sleep mode. SETTINGS • Be sure to use the product only in the country in where it was purchased. • This unit does not support iPod (4th generation or before), iPod without Dock connector, iPod photo and iPod mini. • You cannot run the AUTO SETUP while playing back the iPod/ iPhone by using PDX-50TX. To run the AUTO SETUP, stop playback and then disconnect the iPod/iPhone from PDX-50TX. INPUT PLAYBACK FEATURES FM tuning APPENDIX 27 En Useful features TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC D This function adjusts the volume level of the TV so that it will not increase suddenly when whenever the contents being broadcast change (due to commercials, etc.). OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV I INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT M PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP • To turn off the UniVolume function, press MUNIVOLUME again. • We recommend turning off the UniVolume function during playback of music. Using the HDMI™ control function CODE SET TUNING Press MUNIVOLUME. The UNIVOLUME indicator lights up on the front panel display. 2 Turn on the HDMI control device (Blu-ray disc or DVD player) connected to this unit. 3 Select the HDMI control device (Blu-ray disc or DVD player) as the input source of this unit to check the video input. Note <Note> • In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV may be effective. – “HDMI CONTROL” is set to “ON” on this unit (page 36). – The HDMI control function is enables on the TV. – If you changed the connection method or connected components, repeat steps 1-3. y TV MUTE UNIVOLUME Adjusting volume level automatically (UniVolume) Q R You can operate the following functions of this unit with the remote control of your TV when the TV (HDMI control function supported) is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. • Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with TV) • Adjusting the volume • Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or TV) Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. 1 Press QSLEEP repeatedly to set the interval for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator (page 7) flashes in the front panel display while switching the interval for the sleep timer. y • Even if your TV supports the HDMI control function, some functions may not be available. For details, refer to the manual supplied with your TV. • If you connect this unit and Blu-ray disc player or DVD player (HDMI control function supported) with HDMI, you can also control those devices with the HDMI control function. For details, refer to the manual supplied with each device. • We suggest that you use products (TV, Blu-ray disc/DVD player, etc.) from the same manufacturer. • The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray disc player. 2 To use this function, you need to set HDMI control function and register the HDMI components to the TV. Setting the HDMI control function 1 Turn on all devices connected to this unit with HDMI. 2 Enable the HDMI control function on each device. For this unit, set “HDMI CONTROL” to “ON” (page 36). For external devices, refer to the manual supplied with each device. DInput selector keys GENTER G G / / IOPTION MUNIVOLUME QSLEEP RINFO 3 28 En Sleep 90 min. Sleep 60 min. Sleep 30 min. Sleep Off Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated. • If this unit is set to the standby mode, the sleep timer setting is canceled. Configuring settings for each input source (Option menu) You can configure various settings for each input source (TV, AUX1/2, HDMI1-4, iPod, and FM). Available menu items vary depending on the selected input source. 1 Press DInput selector keys to select the desired input source. 2 Press IOPTION. The first item of the option menu for the selected input source appears on the front panel display. Turn off the TV and then turn on it again. Registering HDMI components to TV 1 120 min. y y • For some HDMI components, you only need to set the HDMI control function. Registering HDMI components to TV is not required in this case. Sleep Select this unit as the input source of the TV. 1.Volume Trim Press G / to select the desired menu item and then press GENTER. 4 Press G / to select the desired setting and then press GENTER. 5 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION. Displaying the input signal information Use to display information of the sampling frequency, video signal type, and resolution for each input source on the front panel display. 1 The following menu items are provided for each input source. Input source Audio Sampling Menu items Volume Trim Decoder Mode TV Volume Trim Decoder Mode AUX1~2 Volume Trim Decoder Mode FM Volume Trim FM Mode iPod Volume Trim 2 Press RINFO repeatedly to change items to be displayed. Sampling frequency (Audio Sampling) The sampling frequency per second in analog- to-digital conversion. Auto Preset Clear Preset Details of the menu items are as follows. The configuration will be reflected to the input source currently selected. y Video signal (Video Signal In) Signal type and resolution of video input signal. Playback Playback mode FM tuning Playing back iPod™ • The initial settings are marked with “*”. Volume Trim (Volume trim) Use to reduce any change in volume when switching input sources by correcting volume differences between input sources. Adjustable range: –6.0dB to +6.0dB (in 0.5 dB steps) Initial setting: 0.0dB PLAYBACK FEATURES HDMI1~4 Select an input source (TV, AUX1/2, and HDMI1-4) and then press RINFO. PREPARATION ■ Option menu items INTRODUCTION 3 Useful features Decoder Mode (Decoder mode) Use to select DTS digital audio signals for reproduction. Choices: Auto*, DTS • Select Auto to automatically select audio input signals. • Select DTS to selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. SETTINGS FM Mode (FM receiving mode) Use to set the FM broadcasting receiving mode. Choices: Stereo*, Mono • Select Stereo to receive in stereo mode by priority. • Select Mono to receive in monaural mode. Auto Preset (Automatic preset) Use to automatically detect FM radio stations and registers them as preset stations (page 25). Clear Preset (Clear preset station) Use to clear the preset FM stations (page 26). APPENDIX 29 En SETTINGS TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC Customizing this unit (SET MENU) D SET MENU items CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU I OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV You can manually configure various settings for this unit in “SET MENU”. OFF Menu MEMORY Sub menu Features Page LOAD Loads the beam and sound settings saved in the memory. 19 SAVE Saves the current beam and sound settings to the memory. 19 BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ Optimizes the beam and sound settings automatically. 16 BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY Optimizes the beam settings automatically. 16 SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY Optimizes the sound settings automatically. 16 SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings. 31 BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings. 32 IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front right and left channels. 32 TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or lowfrequency sound. 33 SUBWOOFER SET Configures the subwoofer settings. 33 AUDIO DELAY Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 33 DRC:Dynamic Range Control Adjusts the dynamic range. 34 BASS EXTENSION Selects the bass sound extension. 34 MUSIC ENHANCER Selects the compressed audio enhancer. 34 CHANNEL LEVEL Adjusts the volume of each channel. 34 SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG Configures the sound beam output settings. 34 SOUND OUT Configures the audio signal output settings. 34 INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 35 INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source. 35 HDMI SETUP Configures the HDMI settings. 36 WIRELESS SETUP Configures the wireless settings. 36 F. DISPLAY SETUP Configures the front panel display settings. 36 OSD SETUP Configures the OSD settings. 37 LANGUAGE SETUP Changes the language used in the OSD. 37 UNIT SETUP Changes the display unit of measurement. 37 TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME MUTE AUTO SETUP SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET MANUAL SETUP TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP SOUND SET MENU SOUND OUT MENU INPUT MENU DISPLAY MENU DInput selector keys GENTER G / G / G ISETUP 30 En / / 1 1 Press ISETUP. SET MENU In “SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3”, configure “INSTALLED POSITION”. Select the installed position of this unit. Choices: FLAT TO WALL* (parallel to wall), ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (angle to wall or corner) FLAT TO WALL ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER PREPARATION p p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SOUND SET MENU ;SOUND OUT MENU ;INPUT MENU ;DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2 INTRODUCTION Basic SET MENU operation Press G / to select the desired menu and then press GENTER. Note • If you change this setting, “BEAM MODE” setting changes automatically (page 23). C)MANUAL SETUP .1)SETTING PARAMETERS 2)BEAM ADJUSTMENT 3)IMAGE LOCATION 2 PLAYBACK FEATURES p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Configure “INSTALLED HEIGHT”. Specify the installed height of this unit. Control range: 0.0 m to 3.0 m (0.0 ft to 10.0 ft) Initial setting: 1.0 m (3.5 ft) y • To return to the previous menu, press IRETURN. 3 Press G / / / and GENTER to configure each parameter. y 0.0 to 3.0 m (0.0 ft to 10.0 ft) • The initial settings are marked with “*”. Note • The menu screen disappears if one of the DInput selector keys is pressed while the SET MENU is being configured. 4 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP. y • Press G 3 MANUAL SETUP Use this menu to manually adjust the parameters related to the sound beam output. To fine-adjust parameters configured by AUTO SETUP, use “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” and “IMAGE LOCATION”. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SETTING PARAMETERS Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room and the distance of this unit from the listening position. y • If you make adjustments in “SETTING PARAMETERS”, the “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” parameters are automatically adjusted. In “SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3”, configure the listening room settings. Specify the length and width of the listening room. Control range: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Customizing this unit (SET MENU) When this unit is installed parallel to wall, specify the width of the listening room and the distance between this unit and rear wall. System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) When this unit is installed at the corner of the room, specify the width of length of the listening room. Controlling external components Using an external amplifier SETTINGS ■ SETTING PARAMETERS (Setting parameters) to proceed to the next page. Note 4 In “SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3”, configure the distance settings. Specify the distance between the listening position and this unit. When this unit is installed parallel to wall, you also need to specify the distance between the listening position and left wall. APPENDIX • If you make adjustments in “SETTING PARAMETERS”, the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will be lost. 31 En Control range (from this unit): 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) Control range (from left wall): 0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft) TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 iPod FM HDMI 4 MOVIE MUSIC FLAT TO WALL ENTER TAINMENT 1.8 to 9.0 m (6.0 to 30.0 ft) STEREO • Configure this setting only when you have adjusted “HORIZONTAL ANGLE”. Control range: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE UNIVOLUME 0.6 to 11.4 m (2.0 to 38.0 ft) G ENTER TOP MENU Configure “BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH”. Adjust the distance that sound beams travel after being output and reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening position so that all sounds can arrive at the listening position at the same time. Note OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND 3 INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP The length of each arrow indicates the beam travel length. ■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment) SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM ADJUSTMENT Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings. Notes • The “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” parameters are automatically adjusted (except “Center” in “FOCAL LENGTH”) if you run the AUTO SETUP (page 15) or if you configure “SETTING PARAMETERS” (page 31). • Depending on the beam mode settings (page 23), some channel positions may not be available for selection. In this case, “– –” is displayed. • If you change “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” settings while playing back your iPod/iPhone connected to PDX-50TX, the subwoofer connected to SWK-W10 outputs the iPod/iPhone audio. We recommend stopping the iPod/iPhone playback during the beam adjustment. 1 Configure “HORIZONTAL ANGLE”. Adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each channel using test tones. Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the right. Control range: L90° to R90° (–) (+) (+) (–) 4 Configure “FOCAL LENGTH”. Adjust the distance from the front of this unit to the focal point of output for each channel to achieve an expansive feeling for each channel. Adjust toward (minus) to move the focus outward (widen the sweet spot) and adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the normal position (narrow the sweet spot). Focal point Focal length Sweet spot Control range: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft) y • We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m or – 1.5 ft) for “Center”. • The width of the sweet spot becomes slightly wider than the width of this unit if you run the AUTO SETUP (page 15) or if you configure “SETTING PARAMETERS” (page 31). Example Front left channel y • Press G 2 (−) to switch the channels. Configure “VERTICAL ANGLE”. Adjust the vertical angle of sound beams for each channel using test tones. Adjust toward – (minus) to move the angle downward and adjust toward + (plus) to move the angle upward. Control range: –45° to +45° (+) 0° (–) G 32 En Center channel (+) ■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location) SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → IMAGE LOCATION Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be heard closer to the center channel. Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound coming from the front left and right channels seems unnatural. y • To adjust the volume of each channel, see “CHANNEL LEVEL” (page 34) Choices: OFF*, ON • Select “ON” to configure the sound direction. Adjust the image location for the front left channel (LEFT). The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center Without adjustment Adjust the image location for the front right channel (RIGHT). The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center Without adjustment With the front right channel adjusted CROSS OVER (Crossover) When “BASS OUT” is set to “SUBWOOFER”, you can use this feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position. Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz* LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level) Adjust the output level of the low-frequency effect (LFE) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 dB to 0 dB* PLAYBACK FEATURES 2 With the front left channel adjusted PREPARATION 1 • Select SUBWOOFER if you connect a subwoofer with a subwoofer cable. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer. • Select FRONT OR AUTO if you do not use a subwoofer or connect a subwoofer by wireless. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front right and left channels when you do not use a subwoofer. They are directed to the subwoofer automatically when a wireless connection between a subwoofer and this unit is established properly. If the wireless connection is cut off, they are directed to the front channels automatically. INTRODUCTION You can adjust this parameter only when “5Beam Plus2”, “5 Beam” or “3 Beam” is selected in “BEAM MODE” (page 23). DISTANCE (Distance) Adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the listening position. Choices: 0.3 m to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) ■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → AUDIO DELAY Use to adjust delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. SOUND SET MENU ■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the tonal quality of sound beams. BASS (Bass) Use to adjust the low-frequency response. Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → SUBWOOFER SET Use to configure the subwoofer settings. System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) Using an external amplifier Controlling external components HDMI Manually adjust the audio output delay applied to signals input from the HDMI IN jacks. This setting is effective only when “AUTO LIP SYNC” is set to “OFF” Control range: 0 msec to 400 msec Initial setting: 30msec APPENDIX BASS OUT (Bass out) Select where to output low-frequency effect (LFE) and low-frequency (bass) signals. Choices: SUBWOOFER, FRONT OR AUTO* TV Adjust the audio output delay applied to signals input from the TV jacks. Control range: 0 msec* to 400 msec Customizing this unit (SET MENU) SETTINGS TREBLE (Treble) Use to adjust the high-frequency response. Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB AUTO LIP SYNC (Automatic lipsync) Select whether to automatically adjust the audio output delay when a TV that supports the automatic lipsync is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Choices: ON*, OFF • Select ON if the TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit supports the automatic lipsync. The audio output delay is automatically adjusted. • Select OFF if the TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit does not support the automatic lipsync or you want to disable the automatic lipsync. You can manually adjust the audio output delay in “HDMI”. AUX1/2 Adjust the audio output delay applied to signals input from the AUX1/2 jacks. Control range: 0 msec to 400 msec Initial setting: 30msec 33 En ■ DRC:Dynamic Range Control (Dynamic range control) TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 iPod FM HDMI 4 MOVIE MUSIC ENTER TAINMENT SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → DRC:Dynamic Range Control Use to adjust the dynamic range compression. Dynamic range is the difference between the smallest sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound that can be heard without distortion. OFF CINEMA DSP STEREO TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control) Select whether to automatically adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. When this function is enabled, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows. When the volume level is low: Narrow the dynamic range. Loud sound is played back softer, and soft sound which is hard to be listened to is played back louder. When the volume level is high: Widen the dynamic range. From soft sound to loud sound, source sound is played back without adjusting volume. On Off Input level Volume : low Output level G ENTER Output level SURROUND On Off Input level Volume : high Choices: On*, Off • Select On to enable the adaptive dynamic range control. • Select Off to disable the adaptive dynamic range control. y • “Dolby/DTS DRC” is automatically set to “Max” when “Off” is selected. • This setting is automatically set to “Off” when the UniVolume function is turned on while this setting is automatically set to “On” when the UniVolume function is turned off. Dolby/DTS DRC (Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and DTS signals) Select the amount of dynamic range applied when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals Choices: Max* (Maximum), Standard, Min/Auto (Minimum/Auto) • Select Max to output sound without adjusting the • dynamic range of the input signals. • Select Standard to set the standard dynamic range • recommended for regular home use. • Select Min/Auto to set the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals (Min) or adjust the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information (Auto). y • “Adaptive DRC” is automatically set to “Off” when the settings other than “Max” is selected. ■ BASS EXTENSION (Bass extension) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → BASS EXTENSION Use to turn on or off the bass sound extension. When this function is enabled, the BASS EXT indicator lights up on the front panel display (page 7). Choices: OFF, MID*, DEEP • Select OFF to output bass sounds without change. • Select MID to output moderately-enhanced bass sounds. • Select DEEP to output deep bass sounds. ■ MUSIC ENHANCER (Music Enhancer) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → MUSIC ENHANCER Use to turn on or off the compressed audio enhancer. When this function is enabled, the ENHANCER indicator lights up on the front panel display (page 7). AUX1/2 Select whether to apply the compressed audio enhancer for playback of AUX1/2 input sources. Choices: ON, OFF* • Select ON to enable the compressed audio enhancer for playback of AUX1/2 input sources. • Select OFF to disable the compressed audio enhancer for playback of AUX1/2 input sources. iPod Select whether to apply the compressed audio enhancer to iPod/iPhone playback. Choices: ON*, OFF • Select ON to enable the compressed audio enhancer for iPod/iPhone playback. • Select OFF to disable the compressed audio enhancer for iPod/iPhone playback. ■ CHANNEL LEVEL (Channel level) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → CHANNEL LEVEL Use to adjust the volume of each channel with test tones. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Note • Adjustable channels vary depending on the “CHANNEL OUT” setting. • “Surround Back R” and “Surround Back L” are not adjustable when “SOUND OUT” is set to “SPEAKER”. SOUND OUT MENU ■ SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG (Sound beam output configuration) SET MENU → SOUND OUT MENU → SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG Use to configure the number of output channels or audio output method. For details, see “Changing the audio output method for surround playback” (page 23). ■ SOUND OUT (Sound output) G / G 34 En SET MENU → SOUND OUT MENU → SOUND OUT Use to configure the audio signal output settings. • The parameters from “BASS OUT” to “LFE Level” are settings for the PRE OUT jacks when they are selected as audio output jacks. BASS OUT (Bass sound output redirection) Use to redirect the output of bass sounds. The settings under “BASS OUT” are for the PRE OUT jacks. Choices: SUBWOOFER, FRONT* • Select SUBWOOFER to output bass sounds from the subwoofer. • Select FRONT to output bass sounds from the external front right and left speakers. Center SP Size (Center speaker size for PRE OUT) Select the size of external center speakers. Choices: None, Small* • Select None if no center speaker is used. Center channel signals are mixed into the front right and left speakers. • Select Small if a center speaker is used. Low-frequency parts of center channel signals are output from the subwoofer (or mixed into the front right and left channel signals if subwoofer is not available). PRE OUT Volume (PRE OUT volume) Adjust the output level of the PRE OUT jacks. Control range: –30.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –18.0 dB AUDIO2 Select the key to which the AUDIO IN (AUX 1) jacks are assigned. Choices: AUX1*, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, TV Note • The input already selected in “AUDIO1” is not displayed. To set the input selected in “AUDIO1”, change “AUDIO1” parameter, and then reconfigure. OPTICAL1 Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (TV) jack is assigned. Choices: TV*, AUX1, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4 Note • The input already selected in “OPTICAL2” or “COAX” is not displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters, change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure. OPTICAL2 Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack is assigned. Choices: AUX1*, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, TV Note • The input already selected in “OPTICAL1” or “COAX” is not displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters, change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure. COAX Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (AUX 2) jack is assigned. Choices: AUX2*, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, TV, AUX1 ■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment) • The input already selected in “OPTICAL1” or “OPTICAL2” is not displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters, change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure. SET MENU → INPUT MENU → INPUT RENAME Use to change the name of the input source displayed when the input source is selected. Select a name from templates, or enter an original name. Using an external amplifier Controlling external components Selecting a name from templates 1 Press G / be renamed. to select the input source to APPENDIX SET MENU → INPUT MENU → INPUT ASSIGNMENT Use to change the key assignments of input jacks on this unit. The parenthetic references displayed in the menu screen indicate the initial settings. See also: “AUDIO SELECT” (page 36) System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) Note ■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename) INPUT MENU Customizing this unit (SET MENU) y • Press G SETTINGS LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level for PRE OUT) Adjust the low-frequency effect output level of the PRE OUT jacks. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 dB to + 0 dB* • The input already selected in “AUDIO2” is not displayed. To set the input selected in “AUDIO2”, change “AUDIO2” parameter, and then reconfigure. PLAYBACK FEATURES Front SP Size (Front speaker size for PRE OUT) Select the size of external front speakers. Choices: Small, Large* • Select Small if the diameter of the front speaker’s woofer is smaller than 16 cm. Low-frequency parts of front right and left channel signals are output from the subwoofer. Note PREPARATION y AUDIO1 Select the key to which the AUDIO IN (TV) jacks are assigned. Choices: TV*, AUX1, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4 INTRODUCTION SOUND OUT (Sound output redirection) Use to redirect the output of audio signals. Audio output of all the channels switches simultaneously. Choices: SPEAKER*, PRE OUT • Select SPEAKER to output sounds from this unit. • Select PRE OUT to output audio signals from the PRE OUT jacks of this unit. You also need to configure the parameters from “BASS OUT” to “LFE Level” described below. to proceed to the next page. 35 En TV C AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 iPod FM HDMI 4 MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC Press G / to select a input source name. Choices: TV, Blu-ray, DVD, HDDVD, STB, Satelite, Game 3 To exit from the menu, press IRETURN. Entering an original name OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND 2 1 Press G / be renamed. 2 Press GENTER. “ ” appears above the new name display to indicate the position to be entered. 3 Press G / to place the _ (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press G character. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit other characters. 6 To complete the setting, press GENTER. 7 To exit from the menu, press IRETURN. STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV I TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME MUTE to select the input source to SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY / to select the desired SLEEP y • A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, and symbols (!, ?, <, >, etc.) are available for input. ■ HDMI SETUP (HDMI setup) SET MENU → INPUT MENU → HDMI SETUP Use to configure the settings related to HDMI signals and HDMI control function. G G / / IRETURN ISETUP 36 En SET MENU → INPUT MENU → WIRELESS SETUP Use to configure the wireless connection between this unit and PDX-50TX or SWK-W10. Wireless Function (Wireless function) Select whether or not to use the wireless function of this unit. Choices: No, Yes* • Select No to disable the wireless function of this unit. • Select Yes to enable the wireless function of this unit. iPod Interlock (iPod interlock) Select whether or not to use the iPod/iPhone interlock function. When the iPod/iPhone interlock function is on, this unit automatically turns on if you turn on the iPod/ iPhone when this unit is in the standby mode. In addition, this unit is set to the standby mode if the iPod/iPhone is set to the standby mode. Choices: OFF, ON* • Select OFF to disable the iPod/iPhone interlock function. The standby consumption power of this unit decreases. • Select ON to enable the iPod/iPhone interlock function. Group ID (Group ID) The group ID is used for wirelessly connecting Yamaha products that support AirWired. To establish a connection among this unit, PDX-50TX and SWK-W10, set the group ID of these products to the same group. Choices: A1*, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 y y ■ F.DISPLAY SETUP (Front panel display setup) Choices: (Model name of this unit)*, OTHER • Select this unit to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. • Select OTHER to play back HDMI audio signals on the component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. GENTER ■ WIRELESS SETUP (Wireless setup) SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio) Use to select a component to play back HDMI audio signals. This setting is effective only when “HDMI CONTROL” is set to “OFF”. • HDMI video signals input to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are always output from the HDMI OUT jack. CPower • Select OFF to turn off the HDMI control function. The standby consumption power of this unit decreases. • Select ON to turn off the HDMI control function. AUDIO SELECT (Audio select) Select whether or not to output HDMI audio signals input to each HDMI IN jacks. This function is useful when you want to enjoy another audio input source while watching HDMI video sources. For example, if you set “HDMI1” of “AUDIO SELECT” to “OFF” and “OPTICAL1” of “INPUT ASSIGNMENT” to “HDMI1” (page 35), you can enjoy the audio source input to the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack while watching the HDMI video source input to HDMI IN 1 jack. Choices: OFF, ON* HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control) Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI controlcompatible TV via HDMI. For details, see “Using the HDMI control function” (page 28). Choices: OFF*, ON • PDX-50TX supports “1” (A1), “2” (A2), and “3” (A3) only. DISPLAY MENU SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → F.DISPLAY SETUP Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the front panel display. STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you operate this unit. Choices: –2, –1, OFF* AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you do not operate this unit. The front panel display automatically dims or turns off according to this setting if no operation is performed for a specified period of time. Choices: DISPLAY OFF, –3 to –1, OFF* • Select OFF for the same brightness as “STANDARD DIMMER”. • Select –3 to –1 to get dimmer (based on “STANDARD DIMMER”). • Select DISPLAY OFF to turn off the front panel display. SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → OSD SETUP Use to adjust the display position and select the background color of the OSD. SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → LANGUAGE SETUP Use to select the language used in the OSD. OSD SHIFT (OSD shift) Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it. Choices: –5 to +5 Initial setting: ±0 Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish), ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch), Русский (Russian) Initial setting: ENGLISH (English) OSD BACK COLOR (OSD background color) Use to select the background color of the OSD. Choices: Blue*, Gray, Black, Purple, Red SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → UNIT SETUP Use this to change the display unit of measurement. Choices: METERS*, FEET • Select METERS to enter distances in meters. • Select FEET to enter distances in feet. PREPARATION ■ LANGUAGE SETUP (Language setup) INTRODUCTION ■ OSD SETUP (OSD setup) ■ UNIT SETUP (Unit setup) Note • If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may change. PLAYBACK FEATURES System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. 1 Press CPower p key to set this unit to the standby mode. 5 Press G / parameter. 2 While holding down INPUT on the front panel, press CPower p key on the remote control. Keep holding down INPUT until “ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel display. 6 Press CPower p key to set this unit to the standby mode. The new setting will be reflected when you turn on this unit next time. to select the desired y • The initial settings are marked with “*”. TURN ON VOLUME (Volume level at power-on) Set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Control range: OFF*, 01 to 99, MAX (Maximum) INPUT INPUT VOLUME MAX VOLUME SET (Maximum volume setting) Set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not output sound beyond the limited volume level. Control range: 01 to 99, MAX* (Maximum) INTELLIBEAM MIC Press ISETUP. 4 Press G / to select the desired menu and then press GENTER. Example (when “DEMO MODE” is selected) VOL DEMOXMODE PANEL INP.KEY (Front panel input key) Select whether or not to enable the INPUT key on front panel key. To disable the operations, select “P.INPUT: OFF”. Choices: P.INPUT: ON*, P.INPUT: OFF F.PANEL KEY (Front panel key) Select whether or not to enable front panel key operations (except ADVANCED SETUP operations). To disable the operations, select “F.PANEL: OFF”. Choices: F.PANEL: ON*, F.PANEL: OFF System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) Using an external amplifier SETTINGS 3 Customizing this unit (SET MENU) Controlling external components y • To return to the previous screen, press IRETURN. APPENDIX 37 En A B TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC D OFF E CINEMA DSP SURROUND F STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE UNIVOLUME H I J MENU OPTION INPUT L MUTE R.INPUT POWER (Power-on by remote control input keys) Select whether or not to automatically turn on this unit when you select an input source on the remote control. To enable the function, select “R.INPUT PW: ON”. Choices: R.INPUT PW: OFF*, R.INPUT PW: ON AC ON STANDBY (Standby after AC on) Set this unit to the standby mode when the AC power is recovered after the power to this unit was lost temporally (disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet, power outage, etc.). To enable the function, select “AC STANDBY: ON”. Choices: AC STANDBY: OFF*, AC STANDBY: ON MEMORY PROTECT (Memory protect) Protect the settings you have saved in the system memory. To protect the settings, select “PROTECT: ON”. Choices: PROTECT: OFF*, PROTECT: ON SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT y • After you checked the sound beam output, set this setting to “BEAM DEMO: OFF”. • If you set “SOUND OUT” to “PRE OUT”, “DEMO MODE” does not function. FACTORY PRESET (Factory preset) Reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory presets. Choices: CANCEL*, RESET N CODE SET DEMO MODE (Demo mode) Test the sound beam output from this unit to experience the sound beam. To set this unit to the demo mode, select “BEAM DEMO: ON”. Choices: BEAM DEMO: OFF*, BEAM DEMO: ON • To move the beam horizontally, turn off this unit and then turn on it again (“DEMO” appears on the front panel display). Playback an input source and then press EOFF. • To stop the beam movement, press EOFF again. • To adjust the beam angle manually, press FSURROUND or FSTEREO when the beam is not moving. O P TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY Using an external amplifier SLEEP You can connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Set “SOUND OUT” (page 34) to “PRE OUT” and then configure “PRE OUT BASS Management” parameters. See also: “Changing the audio output method for surround playback” (page 23) 1 2 3 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 4 PRE OUT 5 ATransmission indicator 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Output front right and left channel signals. BAV BTV 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Output surround right and left channel signals. DInput selector keys EOFF 3 SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks Output surround back right and left channel signals. FSTEREO FSURROUND GCursor ( / / ) keys / 4 CENTER PRE OUT jack Outputs center channel signals. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. GENTER HMENU HTOP MENU Note IRETURN • The following functions are disabled when an external amplifier is used. – AUTO SETUP (page 15) – CINEMA DSP programs (page 22) – UniVolume (page 28) – MUSIC ENHANCER (page 34) – BASS EXTENSION (page 34) – Adaptive DRC (page 34) ISETUP JCH / LTV operation keys NNumeric keys OCODE SET PExternal component operation keys 38 En INTRODUCTION Controlling external components Note Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. 1 While holding down OCODE SET, press DInput selector key to which the remote control code is assigned. ATransmission indicator flashes twice. B TV p Turns on the power of your TV or set it to the standby mode. 2 Release OCODE SET. 3 Press NNumeric keys to enter the remote control code (page 45) for your external component. Each time you press you press the key, ATransmission indicator flashes once. Once the 5digit remote control code is entered properly, ATransmission indicator lights up for approximately 2 seconds. B AV p Turns on the power of the selected component or set it to the standby mode. G Cursor ( / / / Use to select menu items. ) keys, ENTER H TOP MENU Displays the top menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD. y • To clear remote control code set to a selected input source, enter “00010”. H MENU Displays the menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD. Note I RETURN Returns to the previous menu screen. • If any key other than NNumeric keys is pressed, ATransmission indicator flashes 5 times and the setting mode is canceled. J CH / Switches between available channels for your external component. 4 L TV operation keys TV VOL +/– Adjusts the audio output level of your TV. TV MUTE Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV. TV INPUT Switched the input source for your TV. N Numeric keys Use to enter numeric digits or specify a channel number. Perform a test operation using the remote control of this unit. If the external component functions correctly, the remote control code setup is successful. If it does not function correctly, the remote control code may be incorrect. Check the remote control code for your external component (page 45) and try again. Note • If no operation is performed after step 1 or in the middle of step 2 within 30 seconds, ATransmission indicator flashes 5 times and the setting mode is canceled. ■ Resetting all remote control codes 1 P External component operation keys Use to control playback of your external component. 2 Release OCODE SET. 3 Press NNumeric keys to enter “99999”. Each time you press the NNumeric keys, ATransmission indicator flashes once. Once the remote control code is entered properly, ATransmission indicator lights up for approximately 2 seconds and then the initialization is completed. • The BTVp and LTV operation keys always work regardless of the selected input source. Notes System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) Using an external amplifier Controlling external components Note • If one of the other keys is pressed, ATransmission indicator flashes 5 times and the initialization is canceled. APPENDIX • Depending on external components, some or all operations may not work. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. • If you operate your TV with the remote control of this unit when the HDMI control function is activated, this unit or external component connected to this unit with HDMI works improperly in some cases. While holding down OCODE SET, press ISETUP. ATransmission indicator flashes twice. Customizing this unit (SET MENU) SETTINGS O CODE SET Sets remote control codes for external component operations (page 39). y PLAYBACK FEATURES ■ Setting remote control codes PREPARATION You can control external components using the following keys on the remote control of this unit by setting the appropriate remote control codes (page 45). Before operating the control keys, press one of the DInput selector keys to select an external component to be controlled. 39 En APPENDIX Troubleshooting Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem Cause Remedy See page This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the outlet and plug it in again after about 30 seconds. 12 This unit fails to turn on when CPower (p) key is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. The AC power supply cable is not firmly connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the AC power supply cable firmly to the AC wall outlet. 12 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and use it normally. 12 This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool down and turn it back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. 21 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or DInput selector keys. 21 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 21 The sound is muted. Press KMUTE or KVOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 21 The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling frequency) are being received from the source component. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Change the system settings of the source component. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect the HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 12 “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to this unit in “SET MENU”. 36 The output level of the channel is muted. Raise the output level of the channel. 34 The beam setting is inappropriate. Adjust the beam setting. 32 You play back the source in the stereo mode. Start surround playback. 22 Some audio output methods do not output sound beams for certain channels. Select another beam mode. 23 “BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT OR AUTO” in “SUBWOOFER SET”. Set “BASS OUT” to “SUBWOOFER” in “SUBWOOFER SET”. 33 The group IDs of this unit and SWK-W10 are not set to the same value. Check whether the group IDs of this unit and SWKW10 are set to the same value. 36 “Wireless Function” is set to “No”. Set “Wireless Function” to “Yes”. 36 Distorted or too little bass sound. “CROSS OVER” is set incorrectly in “SUBWOOFER SET”. Set “CROSS OVER” correctly in “SUBWOOFER SET”. 33 Surround sound effects are insubstantial. The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped room. — There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path of the sound beam. — No sound. No sound or too small sound from a specific channel No sound from the subwoofer. The source does not contain low bass signals. No sound from the subwoofer connected by wireless. 40 En Digital audio signals cannot be played back. (q DIGITAL indicator does not light up in the front panel display.) Remedy See page The playback component is connected to this unit with an analog connection. Connect them with an HDMI connection or a digital connection. 12 The external component is not set to output digital audio signals. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your component and check the setting. — Bit streaming is disabled on the external component. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your component and check the setting. — The protection circuitry was in operation because a source with strong bass elements was played back. Turn down the volume level. 21 Set “BASS OUT” to “SUBWOOFER” in “SUBWOOFER SET”. 33 Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for “SUBWOOFER SET”. 33 The cable is not connected to the TV or this unit properly. Connect the cable properly. 12 The HDMI control function does not work properly. “HDMI CONTROL” is set to “OFF” in “SET MENU”. Set “HDMI CONTROL” to “ON” in “SET MENU”. 36 The HDMI control function is disabled on your TV. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your TV and check the setting. — The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The automatic lipsync is not effective even “AUTO LIP SYNC” is set to “ON”. The TV does not support the automatic lipsync. Set “AUTO LIP SYNC” to “OFF” and then manually adjust the audio output delay. 33 “Not Available” appears on the front panel display after key operation. The key is unable to function in the current condition. PLAYBACK FEATURES On-screen display does not appear. PREPARATION There is noise interference when a subwoofer is not connected to this unit. Cause INTRODUCTION Problem — ■ FM tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 14 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 25 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 25 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 25 SETTINGS ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work and/or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 14 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 14 APPENDIX 41 En Problem Cannot operate external components with the remote control of this unit. Cause Remedy See page The external component you want to operate is not selected as the input source. Press the desired DInput selector key to select the external component you want to operate. 39 The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another code for the same manufacturer using the “List of remote control codes”. 39 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Use the remote control supplied with the external component. — ■ iPod Problem No sound. Cause Remedy See page PDX-50TX is connected to another device. Select the same group ID as selected on this unit. — PDX-50TX and this unit are not connected since they are set to different groups. Set both PDX-50TX and this unit to the same group. 36 “Wireless Function” is set to “No”. Set “Wireless Function” to “Yes”. 36 Distance is too far. Move PDX-50TX closer to this unit. — There is a device (microwave oven, wireless LAN, etc.) outputting signals in 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move this unit away from the device. If the device is IEEE802.11n-compliant, change the channel setting of the device so as not to affect the unit. — The iPod or iPhone is not connected to PDX-50TX firmly. Connect the iPod or iPhone firmly. — The firmware of the iPod or iPhone is not updated. Download the latest iTunes software to update the firmware of the iPod or iPhone. — The signal from PDX-50TX is blocked by your body or metallic objects, etc. Change the way of holding, orientation, or position of PDX-50TX to avoid the object blocking the signal. — The battery of iPod or iPhone is low. Charge the iPod or iPhone. — The iPod or iPhone is in the process of connecting with this unit. Please wait for a while. — The protection circuitry has been activated by excessive volume. Turn down the volume. 21 The iPod or iPhone being used is not supported by this unit. Use an iPod or iPhone supported by this unit. 27 The iPod or iPhone is not connected to PDX-50TX firmly. Connect the iPod or iPhone firmly. — Suddenly this unit produces sounds even though an iPod or iPhone is not connected. This unit is connected to another device. Change the group ID of this unit. 36 The iPod/iPhone interlock function does not work. “iPod Interlock” is set to “OFF”. Set “iPod Interlock” to “ON”. 36 Controlling volume on the iPod or iPhone does not work. 42 En ■ Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with excitement and realism previously unheard of. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX ■ Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround ■ DTS Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortionfree 6-channel sound (technically, left, right, and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ DTS Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available: Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode for movies. ■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed 43 En APPENDIX Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. SETTINGS ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx ■ DTS 96/24 PLAYBACK FEATURES Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1channel sources. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “flyaround” effects. PREPARATION ■ Dolby Digital INTRODUCTION Glossary for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industrysupported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ LFE 0.1-channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. Specifications AMP SECTION FM SECTION • Maximum Output Power Woofer...........................................................20 W/ch (4 Ω, 100 Hz, 10% THD) Small dia. speaker .............................................2 W/ch (4 Ω, 1 kHz, 10% THD) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .................................................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz Wireless SPEAKER SECTION • Frequency ...................................................................................................2.4 GHz • Speaker type .................................................. 2-way acoustic suspension magnetic • Driver Small dia. speakers.............. 4 cm (1-1/2 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 40 Woofers ....................................................................... 11 cm (4-1/2 in) cone × 2 Tweeters (YSP-5100 only) ................................2.5 cm (1 in) balanced dome x 2 • Frequency response YSP-5100 ............................................... 70 Hz to 20 kHz (-10dB, Stereo mode) YSP-4100 ............................................... 80 Hz to 20 kHz (-10dB, Stereo mode) CONNECTIONS • Input Jacks TV, AUX 1 AUDIO IN............................................................... 2 pairs (Analog) TV, AUX 1 DIGITAL IN (FS=32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz) ...............................................................................................2 (Optical digital) AUX 2 DIGITAL IN (FS=32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz) .............................................................................................. 1 (Coaxial digital) AUX 1 VIDEO IN......................................................................... 1 (Composite) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea, and General models] ....................................... NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................................... PAL AUX 2 VIDEO IN........................................................................ 1 (Component) HDMI IN............................................................................................................ 4 • Output Jacks SUBWOOFER .................................................................................................. 1 VIDEO OUT (composite input or menu screen) ......................... 1 (Composite) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea, and General models] ....................................... NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................................... PAL HDMI OUT ....................................................................................................... 1 • System Connector Jack INTELLIBEAM MIC ....................................................... 1 (Microphone input) RS-232C .................................................................................1 (System control) SYSTEM CONNECTOR .............................. 1 (for subwoofer power interlock) IR IN ......................................................................................1 (System control) IR-OUT ..................................................................................1 (System control) 44 En GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ....................................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Europe and Russia models] ...................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Korea model] ............................................................ AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [General model] ......................................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz [China and Asia models] ............................................ AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption ....................................................................................... 55 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control OFF/Wireless Power OFF ...................................... 0.5 W or less HDMI Control ON/AirWired ON (factory preset).......................... 1.0 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) YSP-5100 Maximum dimension.............1200 x 212 x 90 mm (47-1/4 x 8-3/8 x 3-1/2 in) With stands ........................1200 x 214 x 110.7mm (47-1/4 x 8-3/8 x 4-3/8 in) YSP-4100 Maximum dimension.............1030 x 212 x 90 mm (40-1/2 x 8-3/8 x 3-1/2 in) With stands ........................1030 x 214 x 110.7mm (40-1/2 x 8-3/8 x 4-3/8 in) • Weight YSP-5100 .................................................................................11.0 kg (24.2 lbs) YSP-4100 .................................................................................10.0 kg (22.0 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard: • HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. INTRODUCTION List of remote control codes TV DUMONT DURABRAND DUX D-VISION DWIN DYNAMIC DYNATECH DYNATRON DYNEX ECE ELBE 00201, 15401, 16301 16801, 17601, 18201 15701, 16201 15701, 16201 09201, 10101 14801 15401 15701, 16201 15701 00401 03501, 15001, 15701, 16201 ELBIT 14701 ELECS 14701 ELECTRATUNE 15401 ELECTRO TECH 14801 ELECTROBAND 00001 ELECTROHOME 15401, 16301, 17901, 19001 ELECTRONIKA 14701 ELEKTA 14801, 15701, 16201 ELEKTRA 18601 ELEKTRONIKA 14701 ELG 15701, 16201 ELIN 00401, 06901, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16101, 16201 ELITE 04101, 14701, 15401, 15701, 16201 ELTA 00101, 14801, 14901 EMERSON 02001, 02601, 02701, 03101, 04601, 05801, 07901, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16801, 17201, 17701, 17901, 18201, 18501, 19301 ENVISION 00301, 10601, 16301, 17901 EPSON 11001 ERRES 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 ESC 15701, 16201 ETHER 00101, 00301 ETRON 00101, 14801, 15701, 16201 EUROMAN 15701, 16201 EUROMANN 14701 EUROPA 15701, 16201 EUROPHON 06801, 14701, 15701, 16201 EXCEL 15701, 16201 EXQUISIT 15701, 16201 FAMILY LIFE 15701, 16201 FENNER 14801, 15901 FERGUSON 00401, 01001, 01701, 03201, 03801, 04201, 07101, 15701, 15801, 16201 FIDELIS 14801 FIDELITY 04601, 15701, 16201 FILSAI 14801 FINLANDIA 02901, 04401, 15801 FINLUX 00401, 01401, 01501, 04401, 06801, 14701, 14801, 15101, 15701, 16201 FIRST LINE 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16101, 16201 FIRSTAR 00101, 03101 FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301, 08501 FISHER 01401, 02001, 02901, 04701, 16101, 18901 FLINT 05701, 14701, 15701, 16201 FORMENTI 00401, 04101, 14701, 15701, 16201 ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX 16701, 16801, 17801, 17901, 18101, 18201, 18601 CITY 14801 CLARION 02701 CLARIVOX 00401, 15701, 16201 CLATRONIC 03301, 04701, 14801, 15701, 16201 CLP CLASSIC 16301 COLORTYME 14701, 16301, 17901 COMPUTRON 14801 CONCERTO 16301, 17901 CONCORDE 14801 CONDOR 04101, 04701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 CONIC 14701, 15401 CONRAC 10301 CONRAD 15701, 16201 CONTEC 00101, 02701, 14801, 15701, 16201, 18901 CONTINENTAL EDISON 16001 CORONADO 15401 COSMEL 14801, 15701, 16201 CRAIG 02701, 14701 CROSLEY 00801, 14701 CROWN 00101, 00401, 02701, 04701, 05201, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201 CRYSTAL 14701 CTC 03301 CURTIS MATHES 00301, 00501, 00801, 00901, 01301, 01801, 02001, 02301, 05601, 08901, 11801, 12201, 14701, 15401, 16301, 16601, 16701, 17901, 18101, 18401, 18601, 18701 CXC 02701 DAEWOO 00101, 00301, 00401, 01201, 01601, 02001, 02401, 02601, 02701, 04901, 05601, 07901, 08201, 13101, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 15901, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17901 DAICHI 14801 DANSAI 00401, 15401, 15701, 16201 DAWA 14701, 15701, 16201 DAYTON 00101 DAYTRON 14801, 15401, 15701, 15901, 16201, 16301, 17901 DE GRAAF 02901, 06901 DECCA 00401, 06801, 14701, 15701, 16201 DEITRON 15701, 15901, 16201 DENON 01801 DENVER 14801, 15701, 16201 DESMET 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 DIAMANT 15701, 16201 DIAMOND 14801 DIGATRON 00401 DIGILINE 15701, 16201 DIGISTAR 17001, 17501 DIGITOR 15701, 16201 DIK 15701, 16201 DIMENSIA 18401, 18701 DIXI 00101, 00401, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 DORIC 16101 DTS 14801 DUAL 14701, 14801, 15001, 15301, 15601, 15701, 15801, 16001, 16101, 16201 PLAYBACK FEATURES 14801, 16201 16201 14701, 14801, 15401 00101 01201, 01601, 08401 01301, 02201, 05801, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15201, 18601 ADVENT 09601 ADYSON 14701, 15401 AEA 15701, 16201 AGB 06801 AIKO 01201, 14801, 15701, 16201 AIM 15701, 16201 AIWA 16901, 17101, 17701, 18301 AKAI 00101, 00301, 02901, 04601, 06801, 08901, 10501, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16701 AKIBA 15701, 16201 AKITO 15701, 16201 AKURA 03701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 ALBA 00101, 00401, 04801, 08501, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 ALFA 14701 ALLSTAR 14701, 15701, 16201 AMERICA ACTION 02701 AMPRO 09401 AMSTRAD 00101, 00401, 02501, 04801, 05101, 05301, 06801, 14801, 15001, 15701, 16201 ANAM 00101, 02701, 03401, 15701, 16201 ANAM NATIONAL 03401, 08301, 15701, 16201 ANGLO 14801 ANITECH 00101, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201 ANSONIC 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 AOC 00101, 00301, 00901, 01201, 01301, 01601, 02601, 02701, 05601, 14701, 15401, 16301, 16501, 17901 APEX DIGITAL 09301, 09701, 09901 AR SYSTEM 15701, 16201 ARC EN CIEL 16001 ARCAM 16001 ARDEM 15701, 16201 ARISTONA 14701, 15701, 16201 ART TECH 14701 ASA 01401 ASBERG 14701, 15701, 16201 ASORA 14801 ASTRA 14801, 15701, 16201 ATLANTIC 14701, 15701, 16201 ATORI 14801 ATORO 14801 AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 AUDIOTON 14801 AUDIOVOX 14701 AUTOVOX 15501, 16101 AWA 00101, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 BAIRD 15801 BANG & OLUFSEN 07201 00101 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 BAUR 00401, 04601, 06701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16101, 16201 BAYSONIC 02701 BEAUMARK 02601 BEC 14701 BECRESE 14701, 15401 BEKO 04701, 06201, 09001, 09101, 14701, 15701, 16201 BELCOR 16301 BELL & HOWELL 02001, 14701, 18401, 18601, 18701 BENCHMARK-BEAUMARK 14701, 14801, 15401 BEON 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 BESTAR 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 BESTAR-DAEWOO 15901 BIGSTON 14801 BLACK DIAMOND 16201 BLAUPUNKT 02801 BLUE SKY 08501, 11401, 14701, 15701, 16201 BONDSTEC 03301, 15501 BPL 15701, 16201 BRADFORD 02701 BRANDT 01701, 04201, 15801, 16001 BRENDSTAR 14801 BRINKMANN 15701, 16201 BRIONVEGA 14701, 15001, 15701, 16201 BRIORRYEGA 14701 BROCKWOOD 15401 BROKSONIC 03101, 05801, 15401, 16801 BROKWOOD 16301 BUSH 00101, 00101, 00401, 04801, 04901, 08501, 11401, 14701, 15701, 15901, 16101, 16201 BYDESIGN 14301, 14401, 14501, 14601 CAMPLE 15401 CANDLE 00301, 15401, 16301, 17801, 17901 CAPEHART 14701, 15401 CARAD 15701, 16201 CARENA 15701, 16201 CARNIVALE 00301 CARREFOUR 14701, 15701, 16201 CARVER 00801, 02401, 14701 CASCADE 00101, 15701, 16201 CASIO 15701, 16101, 16201 CATHAY 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 CCE 00401, 15701, 16201 CELEBRITY 00001 CELERA 09701 CENTURION 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201, 17901 CGE 03301, 14801, 16001 CGM 14801 CHANGHONG 09701 CHING TAI 00101, 01201 CHUN YUN 00001, 00101, 01201, 02701 CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601, 02701 CIE 14801 CIMLINE 00101, 14801 CINERAL 01201, 05601 CIRCUIT CITY 15401 CITIZEN 00301, 00901, 01201, 14701, 15401, 16301, PREPARATION ACCENT ACCUPHASE ACTION ACURA ADDISON ADMIRAL BASIC BASIC LINE 45 En FORTRESS FRABA FRIAC FRONTECH 01301, 15401 15701, 16201 15701, 16201 02201, 03301, 03701, 14801, 16101 FUJITSU 08701, 10401, 15401, 15701, 16201 FUJITSU GENERAL 15001 FUNAI 02501, 02701, 03701, 14801, 15401, 17201, 17701, 18201 FUTURE 15701, 16201 FUTURETECH 02701 GALAXI 15701, 16201 GALAXIS 15701, 16201 GALERIA 14801 GATEWAY 13301, 13401 GBC 14801, 15901 GE 00301, 00501, 00601, 01201, 02601, 02701, 05601, 07101, 11801, 12201, 12601, 15801, 16301, 16401, 16601, 17301, 17401, 17901, 18401, 18701, 19001, 19101 GEC 00401, 06801, 15701, 16101, 16201 GELOSO 00101, 14801, 15901 GEMSOUND 14801 GENERAL 14801 GENERAL ELECTRIC 15801 GENERAL TECHNIC 14801 GENEXXA 02201, 14701, 15701, 16201 GIBRALTER 00201, 00301, 16301 GITEM 14701 GM 14801 GMG 14801 GOLDHAND 14801 GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401, 01701, 02001, 02601, 05001, 14701, 14801, 15201, 15401, 15501, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17701, 17901, 18901 GOODMANS 00401, 04801, 04901, 08201, 14701, 14801, 15701, 15801, 15901, 16201 GOREMJE 04701 GPM 14801 GRADIENTE 00701, 02401, 15701, 16201 GRADIN 14701, 14801 GRAETZ 02201, 04601, 15701, 16201 GRANADA 00401, 02901, 04301, 06801, 14701, 15701, 15801, 16201 GRANDIN 07701, 15701, 15901, 16201 GRENADIER 14801 GRUNDIG 00401, 02801, 06301, 07001, 07401, 15701, 16201 GRUNPY 02701 GTT 14801 HAIER 17601, 18801 HALLMARK 02601, 15401, 16301, 17901 HANKOOK 00301, 02601, 02701 HANSEATIC 00401, 04101, 04601, 05201, 07001, 14701, 14801, 15301, 15701, 16101, 16201 HANTAREX 06801, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 HANTOR 15701, 16201 HARLEY DAVIDSON 15401 HARMAN/KARDON 00801 46 En HARRAD HARVARD HARWOOD HAUPPAUGE HAVERMY HCM 15401 02701, 15401 15701, 16201 15701, 16201 01301 00101, 05101, 14801, 15701, 16201 HEATHKIT 14701 HEDZON 15701, 16201 HELLO KITTY 05601 HEMMERMANN 16101 HIFIVOX 16001 HIGHLINE 15701, 16201 HILINE 14801 HINARI 00101, 00401, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 HISAWA 05701 HISENSE 19201 HITACHI 00101, 00301, 01201, 01501, 01701, 01801, 02201, 02601, 03001, 04501, 06101, 06901, 07301, 11701, 12101, 14701, 15401, 15701, 15801, 16101, 16201, 16301, 17701, 17901, 18601, 18901 HORIZONT 14701 HORNYPHON 14701 HORNYPHONE 15701, 16201 HUA TUN 00101 HUANYU 04901, 15901 HYPER 14801, 15501 HYPSON 00401, 03701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 IBERIA 15701, 16201 ICE 03701, 04801, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 ICT 15701, 16201 IMA 15401 IMPERIAL 03301, 04701, 05201, 14701, 15701, 16101, 16201 INDIANA 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 INFINITY 00801, 14701 INGELEN 02201 INGERSOLL 14801 INNO HIT 06801, 14701, 14801, 15201, 15701, 16201 INNOHIT 14701, 14801, 15201 INNOVA 00401 INNOVATION 15701, 16201 INSIGNIA 16801, 17001, 17201, 17501, 17601, 18001, 18201, 19401, 19501 INTEQ 00201 INTERACTIVE 15701, 16201 INTERBUY 14801, 15701, 16201 INTERDISCOUNT 14701 INTERFUNK 00401, 02201, 03301, 04601, 06701, 14701, 15701, 16101, 16201 INTERNAL 15701, 15901, 16201 INTERVISION 00401, 03701, 05001, 14901, 15701, 16201 IRRADIO 14701, 14801, 15101, 15201, 15501, 15701, 16201 IST 14701 ISUKAI 14701, 15701, 16201 ITL 14801 ITS 04801, 14801, 15701, 16201 ITT 02201, 04601, 06901, 16101 ITT NOKIA 16101 ITV 15701, 15901, 16201 JBL 00801, 14701 JC PENNEY 16301, 16401, 16501, 16601, 16701, 17301, 17401, 17801, 17901, 18101, 18401, 18501, 18701, 18901, 19001, 19101, JCB 00001 JEAN 00101, 00601, 01201, 02101, 03101 JENSEN 09601, 16301, 17901, 19501 JETPOINT 14701 JINLIPU 14801 JMB 15701, 15901, 16201 JULIBEE 16201 JUMBOTRONIC 14701 JVC 00701, 04801, 05801, 08401, 08701, 14701, 18901 KAISER 14701 KAISUI 00101, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 KAPSCH 02201 KARCHER 07701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 KATHREIN 07001, 15701, 16201 KAWASHO 16301, 17901 KEC 02701 KENDO 00401, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15701, 16201 KENNEDY 15001 KENWOOD 00301, 15401, 16301, 17901 KIOTA 14801 KITION 16201 KITON 15701 KLH 15401 KNEISSEL 03501, 05401, 15301, 15701, 15901, 16201 KOBIC 14801 KOLIN 00701, 01601, 02701 KOLSTER 14701, 15701, 16101, 16201 KONICHI 14801 KONKA 15701, 16201, 18001, 19401 KORPEL 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 KOSMOS 15701, 16201 KOYODA 00101 KTV 00301, 02701, 15401 KUASHO 14701, 15401 KUBA 16101 KUBA ELECTRONIC 16101 KURAZAI 18601 L&S ELECTRONIC 10301 LEADER 14801 LECSON 15701, 16201 LEGEND 14801 LENCO 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 LENOIR 14801 LEVIS AUSTRIA 15701, 16201 LEYCO 00401, 03701, 14701, 15701, 16201 LG 00301, 00401, 00901, 01601, 02601, 09001, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17701, 17901, 18901 LIESENK & TTER 00401, 15701, 16201 LIESENK?TTER 14701 LIESENKOTTER 14701, 15701, 16201 LIFE 14801 LIFETEC 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 LINITRON 15401 LLOYD 15401 LLOYD’S 14801 LODGENET 18401, 18601, 18701 LOEWE 06701, 14701, 15701, 16201 LOGIK 15701, 16201, 18401, 18601, 18701 LUMA 14701, 14801, 15001, 15701, 15901, 16201 LUMATRON 15701, 16201 LUX MAY 14701, 15701, 16201 LUXMAN 16301, 17901 LUXOR 04501, 04601, 15201, 16101 LXI 00501, 00801, 02001, 02101, 02601, 14701, 16301, 16601, 17401, 17701, 17901, 18101, 18401, 18701 M ELECTRONIC00101, 00401, 01401, 01501, 01701, 02201, 03801, 04401, 04901, 06001, 14801 M ELECTRONICS14701, 14801 MACYS 15401 MADISON 15701, 16201 MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801, 14701, 14801 MAGNAFON 06801 MAGNASONIC14701, 14801, 15401 MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801, 12001, 12601, 14701, 15701, 16201, 16301, 17201, 17801, 17901 MAGNUM 15701, 16201 MAJESTIC 18401, 18601, 18701 MANESTH 03701, 04101, 14701, 15701, 16201 MANHATTAN 15701, 16201 MARANTZ 00301, 00401, 00801, 07001, 14701, 15701, 16201, 16301, 17901 MARK 00401, 14701, 15701, 15901, 16201 MASUDA 15701, 16201 MATSUI 00101, 00401, 02901, 04801, 06301, 06801, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16101, 16201 MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301 MAVA 15401 MAXAM 14801 MAXELL 14801 MCE 14801 MEDIATOR 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 MEDION 08501, 10301, 11401, 15701, 16201 MEGATRON 01801, 02601, 16301, 17901 MELECTRONIC15701, 15801, 15901, 16101, 16201 MEMOREX 00101, 01901, 02001, 02601, 03401, 05801, 11401, 14801, 16301, 16801, 17901, 18401, 18601, 18701 MEMPHIS 14801 MERCURY 14801, 15701, 16201 METZ 05501, 15701, 16201 MGA 00301, 01901, 02601, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17901, 18901, 19001 MICROMAXX 10301, 15701, 16201 MICROSTAR 10301 MIDLAND 00201, 00501, 00601, 15401, 16401, 16601, 17401, 18701 MINATO 15701, 16201 MINERVA 06301 MINOKA 05101, 14701, 15701, 16201 MINUTZ 19101 MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301, 01601, 01901, 02001, 02601, 02701, 03101, 03401, 06701, 11201, 11901, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201, 16301 16501, 17901, 19001 MIVAR 03901, 04001, 06801, 07601, 15201, 15301 MONTGOMERY WARD18401, 18601, PYMI QUASAR SAMSUX SAMTRON SANKY SANSEI SANSUI 15401, 17901 16701 15401 05601 05801, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16801 SANYO 01401, 02001, 02701, 02901, 04301, 10201, 14801, 15301, 15701, 16201, 16301, 18901 SAVE 15701, 16201 SBR 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 SCEPTRE 20201 SCHAUB LORENZ 04601, 15901, 16101 SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301, 04801, 08501, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15301, 15501, 15601, 15701, 15801, 16101, 16201 SCOTCH 02601, 16301, 17901 SCOTT 02601, 02701, 03101, 15401, 16301, 17901 SEARS 00501, 00801, 02001, 02101, 02501, 02601, 16301, 16601, 16701, 17201, 17401, 17901, 18101, 18201, 18401, 18701, 18901 SEG 03701, 08501, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16101, 16201 SEI 06801, 15701, 16101, 16201 SEI-SINUDYNE 14701, 15701, 16201 SELECO 02201, 03501, 15001, 15301 SEMIVOX 02701 SEMP 02101 SEMUA 15401 SENCORA 14801 SENTRA 16101 SHARP 00301, 01301, 08301, 15401, 16301, 17901 SHEN YING 00101, 01201 SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301, 03101 SHINTOSHI 15701, 16201 SHIVAKI 14701, 15701, 15901, 16201 SHOGUN 16301 SHOW 14801 SIAREM 06801 SIEMENS 00401, 02801, 14701, 15401, 15701, 16201 SIERA 15701, 16201 SIERRA 14701 SIGNATURE 18401, 18601, 18701, 19301 SILMA 14701 SILVA 14801, 15701, 16201 SILVER 15701, 16201 SIMPSON 17801 SINGER 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 SINUDYNE 06801, 14701, 15001, 15701, 16101, 16201 SKANTIC 04501 SKY 00401, 15701, 16201 SKYGIANT 02701 SKYWORTH 00401 SNYDER 14701 SOLAVOX 02201, 15701, 16201 SONIKO 15701, 16201 SONITRON 02901 SONNECLAIR 15701, 16201 SONOKO 00101, 00401, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 SONOLOR 02201, 02901 SONTEC 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 SONY 00001, 08301, 11101, 11601, 12701, 12901, 15701, 16201 SOUND & VISION PLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX 14801 00601, 03401, 08301, 16401 QUELLE 00401, 01401, 04601, 06701, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15101, 15201, 15401, 15501, 15701, 16101, 16201 R LINE 14701, 15701, 16201 RADIALVA 15701, 16201 RADIO SHACK15401, 15701, 16201, 16301, 17701, 17901, 18401, 18701, 18901 RADIOLA 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 RADIOMARELLI06801, 15701, 16201 RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501, 02001, 02601, 02701 RADIOSTONE 16201 RADIOTONE 14701, 14801, 15701 RCA 00001, 00301, 00501, 01101, 01201, 02601, 08601, 11501, 11801, 13901, 12201, 12501, 12601, 12801, 15801, 16301, 16401 16501, 16601, 17401, 17901, 18401, 18701, 19001 REALISTIC 00301, 02001, 02601, 02701, 16301, 17701, 17901, 18401, 18701, 18901 RECOR 15701, 16201 RECORD 14701 RECTILIGNE 15701, 16201 REDIFFUSION 04601 REDSTAR 15701, 16201 REFLEX 15701, 16201 REGENTE 14801 REOC 09001 REVOX 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 REVOX/STUDER14701 REX 02201, 03501, 03701, 15001, 15301 RFT 05201, 15301, 15701, 16201 RICOH 15701, 16201 R-LINE 00401 RMB 15401 ROADSTAR 00101, 03701, 05201, 14801, 15701, 16201 RODEX 15701, 16201 ROSITA 14801 ROWA 14801 ROYAL 14801 RUKOPIR 15701, 16201 RUNCO 00201, 00301, 06501, 07501 SABA 01701, 02201, 03801, 04201, 15801, 16001 SACCS 03201 SAGEM 07701 SAISHO 00101, 03701, 06801, 14701 SAIVOD 15701, 16201 SAKURA 14801 SALORA 02201, 04601, 06901, 15201, 16101 SAMBERS 06801, 15101, 15201 SAMPO 00101, 00301, 01201, 01301, 02001, 02501, 02601, 08301, 13301, 15401, 16301, 17901, 18901 SAMSUNG 00101, 00301, 00401, 00901, 01101, 01201, 02001, 02601, 03701, 04701, 07001, 07401, 07801, 08901, 09801, 10501, 10701 14701, 14801, 15201, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 16601, 16701, 17901, 18101, 18901, 20301 PREPARATION 16201 OTTO-VERSAND14701, 14801, 14901 PACIFIC 15701, 16201 PAEL 15101 PALLADIUM 04701, 05201, 14701, 15701, 16101, 16201 PALSONIC 15701, 16201 PANAMA 03701, 14801, 15701, 16201 PANASHIBA 14801 PANASONIC 00401, 00601, 00801, 02201, 03401, 08301, 12401, 14701, 15701, 16201, 16401 PANAVISION 15701, 16201 PANAVOX 14801 PANORAMA 14801 PATHE CINEMA03201, 04101, 15301, 16101 PATHE MARCONI16001 PAUSA 00101, 14801 PCE/PEC 15401 PENNEY 00301, 00501, 00601, 00901, 02101, 02601, 12201, 15401 PERDIO 04101, 15701, 16201 PERFEKT 14701, 15701, 16201 PHILCO 00301, 00401, 00801, 01801, 02601, 02701, 03301, 05801, 13101, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17801, 17901 PHILIPS 00001, 00301, 00401, 00601, 00801, 01201, 01601, 02601, 04901, 07001, 08801, 12601, 15701, 15801, 15901, 16201, 16301 17201, 17301, 17801, 18201 PHILIPS (F) 14701 PHOENIX 14701, 15701, 16201 PHONOLA 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 PILOT 00301, 15701, 16201, 16301 PIONEER 01701, 02201, 02301, 03801, 08601, 09501, 11301, 14701, 15701, 15801, 16201, 16301, 17901 PLANTRON 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 POLAROID 19201, 19501, 19601 POPPY 14801 PORTLAND 01201, 15401, 15901, 16301, 16501, 17901 PRANDONI PRINCE15101 PRANDONI-PRINCE06801 PRICE CLUB 16701 PRIMA 09601, 14801, 15401, 17001, 17501 PRINCESS 14801 PRINZ 16101 PRISM 00601, 16401 PROELCO 14701 PROFEX 00101, 04601, 14801, 14901 PROFITRONIC 14701, 15701, 16201 PROLINE 15701, 16201 PROSCAN 00501, 16601, 17401, 18401, 18701 PROSONIC 15701, 15901, 16201 PROTEC 14701, 14801 PROTECH 00101, 00401, 03301, 03701, 05201, 08501, 15701, 16101 PROTECT 16201 PROTON 00101, 00301, 02601, 14801, 15401, 16301, 17901, 18901 PROVISION 15701, 16201 PULSAR 00201, 16301 PULSER 14701, 14801, 15401 PYE 14701, 15701, 15901, 16101, 16201 INTRODUCTION 18701 15701, 16201 01301, 14701 00301, 00901, 06701, 15401, 16101, 16301, 16501, 16701, 17901, 18101 MULTITEC 15701, 16201 MULTITECH 00101, 02701, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16101, 16201 MUSIKLAND 15701, 16201 MYRYAD 07001, 15701, 16201 NAD 02101, 02601, 04601, 11301, 16301, 17901, 18101 NAIKO 15701, 16201 NAKIMURA 15701, 15901, 16201 NAMSUNC 14801 NATIONAL 14701 NEC 00101, 00301, 00601, 02001, 02101, 02401, 02601, 05701, 06501, 13201, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17901 NECKERMANN00401, 07001, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15701, 16101, 16201 NEI 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 NETSAT 00401, 15701, 16201 NEUFUNK 15701, 16201 NEWAVE 00101, 01201, 01301, 02601 NEWTECH 14701, 14801, 15701, 15801, 16201 NEXXTECH 17501 NIKKAI 00401, 03701, 14701, 15401, 15701, 16201 NIKKO 00301, 01201, 02601, 16301, 17901 NOBLEX 14801 NOBLIKO 15101 NOGAMATIC 16001 NOKIA 04601, 05901, 06001, 06901, 08101, 14801, 15901, 16101 NONAME 14701 NORCENT 09301, 10801 NORDMENDE 01701, 03801, 07101, 15701, 15801, 16001, 16201 NORMEREL 15701, 16201 NOVABEAM 14701 NOVATRONIC 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 NTC 01201 O GENERAL 14801 OCEANIC 02201, 04601 OKANO 14801, 15701, 16201 OLEVIA 19701, 19801, 19901, 20001 OLYMPIC 14801 ONCEAS 14801 ONWA 02701, 05301 OPERA 14701, 15701, 16201 OPTIMUS 02001, 02301, 03401, 08301 OPTONICA 01301 ORBIT 14701, 15701, 16201 ORIENT 14801 ORION 00401, 03101, 04101, 05801, 06801, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16801 ORLINE 15701, 16201 ORMOND 15701, 16201 OSAKI 03701, 05101, 15701, 15901, 16201 OSIO 15701, 16201 OSUME 15701, 16201 OTF 14801 OTTO VERSAND00401, 04101, 06701, 07001, 14701, 14801, 14901, 15501, 15601, 15701, 15801, 16101, MORGAN’S MOTOROLA MTC 47 En 15701, 15901, 16201 SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701, 15401, 16301, 17801, 17901 SOUNDMASTER 14801 SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201, 15701, 16201 SOWA 00601, 00901, 01201, 02101, 02601 SPECTRICIAN 14701, 15401 SQUAREVIEW 02501, 18201 SSS 02701, 16301 STANDARD 00101, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 STARLITE 02701, 14801, 15701, 16201 STARLUX 14801 STERN 02201, 03501, 15001, 15301 STRATO 15701, 16201 SUNIC LINE 15701, 16201 SUNKAI 15701, 16201 SUNSTAR 14801, 15701, 16201 SUNWOOD 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 SUPERSCAN 17201 SUPERTEC 14801 SUPERTECH 14801, 15701, 16201 SUPRA 14801, 15901, 16301 SUPREMACY 15401 SUPREME 00001 SUTRON 14801 SYC LINE 14801 SYLVANIA 00301, 00801, 02501, 14701, 16301, 16801, 17201, 17701, 17801, 17901, 18201 SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701, 15401, 17201, 17701, 18201 SYNCO 00001, 00901, 01201, 01301, 02601, 05601 SYNTAX 19701 SYSLINE 00401, 15701, 16201 T+A 05501 TACICO 00101, 01201, 02601 TAI YI 00101 TANDBERG 15001 TANDY 01301, 02201 TASHIKO 01201, 08301 TATUNG 00101, 00401, 00601, 00801, 00901, 02001, 02101, 06801, 14701, 15701, 16201, 18801 TCM 10301 TEAC 00101, 00401, 03701, 05101, 05201, 05701, 08501, 11401, 15701, 16101, 16201 TEAK 14801 TEC 03301, 14801, 15001, 15701, 16201 TECH LINE 15701, 16201 TECHNEMA 04101 TECHNICS 00601, 03401, 08301, 14701, 16401 TECHNILAND 14701 TECHNISAT 15701, 16201 TECHNOL 14801 TECHWOOD 00601, 16301, 16401, 17901 TECNISON 14801 TECO 00101, 00601, 01201, 01301, 02601, 03701, 08401 TEDELEX 14801, 15701, 16201 TEKNANT 14701, 14801 TEKNIKA 00801, 00901, 01201, 01901, 02701, 15401, 16301, 16501, 16701, 17801, 17901, 18101, 18401, 18601, 18701, 18901, TEKON 14801 TELEAVIA 15801, 16001 TELECOR 15701, 16201 TELEFAC 14801 TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601, 04201, 48 En 08001, 08901, 15701, 15801, 16001, 16201 TELEFUSION 15701, 16201 TELEGAZI 15701, 16201 TELEMEISTER 04101, 15701, 16201 TELEOPTA 14801 TELERENT 18401, 18601, 18701 TELESONIC 15701, 16201 TELESTAR 14801, 15701, 16201 TELETECH 00101, 14801, 15701, 16201 TELETON 16101 TELEVIEW 15701, 16201 TEMPEST 14801, 15701, 16201 TENNESSEE 15701, 16201 TENSAI 04101, 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 TENSON 14801 TERA 00301, 16301 TESLA 14701 TESLA ORAVA14701 TEVION 15701, 16201 TEXET 15901 THOMAS 14701, 14801, 15401 THOMSON 01701, 03801, 07101, 08001, 12501, 15701, 15801, 16001, 16101, 16201 THORN 00401, 01401, 04601, 06701, 14701, 15101, 15701, 15801, 15901, 16201 THORN-FERGUSON 14701, 15001 TMK 02601, 16301, 17901 TNCI 00201 TOBO 14801 TOKAI 14701, 15701, 15901, 16201 TOSHIBA 00901, 02001, 02101, 06601, 07801, 08301, 10901, 12101, 12301, 13001, 13201, 16701, 18101, 18901 TOSONIC 15401 TOTEVISION 15401 TOWADA 16101 TRANS CONTINENS 15701, 16201 TRANSONIC 15701, 16201 TREVI 14801 TRIAD 14701, 15701, 16201 TRILUX 14701 TRIUMPH 06801, 15701, 16201 TRIVISION 14801 TUNTEX 00101, 00301, 01201 TVS 05801 TVTEXT 95 16201 UHER 04101, 14701, 15701, 15901, 16201 ULTRAVOX 15701, 15901, 16201 UMA 14701 UNIC LINE 15701, 16101, 16201 UNIMOR 14701 UNITED 15701, 16201 UNIVERSAL 17301, 19101 UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401, 01501, 03701, 04401, 04701, 06401, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16101, 16201 UNIVOX 15701, 16201 URANYA 14801 VANGUARD 14801 VECO 14801 VECTOR RESEARCH 00301 VESTEL 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 VEXA 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 VICTOR 00701, 03401, 08301, 08401 VIDEO SYSTEM 14701, 15701, 16201 VIDEOSAT 03301 VIDEOTECHNIC 15901 00801 14801 02601, 16301, 16501, 17901 VIEWSONIC 13301 VISION 04101, 14801, 15701, 16201 VISON 14701 VIZIO 18801 VORTEC 14701, 15701, 16201 VOXSON 02201, 14701, 15701, 16201 WALTHAM 04501, 15701, 16201 WARDS 00301, 00801, 02601, 11301, 14701, 16301, 16501, 17301, 17801, 17901, 18401, 18601, 18701, 19101 WATSON 00401, 04101, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 WATT RADIO 16101 WAYCON 02101 WEGA 15701, 16201 WEGAVOX 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 WELTBLICK 14701, 15701, 16201 WESTON 15701, 16201 WHARFEDALE 15701, 16201 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 00401, 04101, 05801, 07901, 14701, 15701, 16201, 17701 WINSTON 14701, 14801 WINTERNITZ 14801 WORLDVIEW 14701, 14801 XRYPTON 15701, 16201 YAMAHA 00301, 01801, 08301, 10001, 11001, 13501, 13601, 13701, 13801, 14001, 14101, 14201, 16301, 16501, 17901 YAMAJI 03609 YAMISHI 15701, 16201 YAPSHE 03401 YOKAN 15701, 16201 YOKO 00401, 03701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 YORK 14701 ZENITH 00201, 01201, 02601, 05801, 14701, 16301, 16801, 17701, 17901, 18601, 19301 VIDIKRON VIDION VIDTECH DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 02805, 05605 AIWA 05605, 05705, 07105 AKAI 07505 ALBA 02605 AMSTRAD 02305 APEX 07605, 08705 APEX DIGITAL 02105, 02605, 03005, 03505, 03605, 03705, 04105, 05805 AUDIOVOX 08805 AXION 08805 BBK 06105, 06205, 06305, 06405, 06505, 06605, 06705, 06805, 06905, 07005 BLAUPINKT 02605 BLAUPUNKT 08705 BLUE PARADE 01005 BLUE SKY 05805 BRANDT 06005 BUSH 02305, 05905 CENTREX 02105 CENTRIOS 08805 CINEVISION 07405 CLASSIC 05605 CLATRONIC 03405 COBY 07305, 07605, 07905, 08005, 08105, 08305, 08505 CONCEPT 08705 CONIA 05805 CROWN 06005 CURTIS INTERNATIONAL 08505 CYBERHOME 02405 CYTRON 06005 DAEWOO 03205, 03305 DANSAI 03205 DECCA 03205 DENON 00005 DIAMOND 03105, 06005 DIGITREX 02105, 07605 Digitrex 05805 DISNEY 08405 DUAL 05605, 06005 DURABRAND 07405 DVD2000 00205 ELTA 05905, 07205, 07505 EMERSON 01205, 07405, 07805, 08405, 08605 ENTERPRISE 01205 FERGUSON 06005 FISHER 02005 FUNAI 07805, 08405 GE 00305, 02605, 08705 GO VIDEO 02505 GOLDSTAR 02905, 07405 GOODMANS 05905, 06005 GRADIENTE 01805 GREENHILL 02605, 08705 GRUNDIG 00705, 06005 HARMAN KARDON 08205 HARMAN/KARDON 05505 HELIOS 09205 HITACHI 01105, 01905 HITEKER 02105, 05805, 07605 INITIAL 08705 INSIGNIA 07405, 07705, 07805, 08705, 08805 JBL 08205 JVC 00905, 01305 KENWOOD 00005, 00605 KLH 02605, 08705 KONKA 07705 KOSS 01805 KXD 07305 LENCO 06005 LENOXX 05905, 07505 LG 02905, 07405 LIFETEC 06005 LIMIT 03105 LIQUIDVIDEO 08805 MAGNAVOX 00105, 02205, 07805 MARANTZ 00705, 07405 MATSUI 06005 MBO 05905 MEDION 06005 MEMOREX 03805 MICO 02705 MICROSOFT 00305 MINTEK 02605, 08705 MITSUBISHI 00205 MUSTEK 02805, 05605 Mx ONDA 06005 NAD 07405 NESA 02605, 08705 NORCENT 08005, 08505 ONKYO 00105 OPPO 08905, 09005, 09105 ORITRON 01805, 06005 PALSONIC 02105, 05805 PANASONIC 00005, 01605, 04205 PHILIPS 00105, 00705, 01705, 03905, 07805, 08405 PIONEER 00405, 01005, 01505, 01605 POLK AUDIO 00705 PORTLAND 07505 PROLINE 06005 PROSCAN 00305 PROSONIC 08005 QWESTAR 01805 01307 00907 00307 00707 00207 00807 00607 01007, 01107 00507 01207 00407 00007, 00107 DVD RECORDER PHILIPS VICTOR YAMAHA 00806 01406 00706 VCR ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA APPENDIX 01102 00002 02102 00002, 00402, 02202, 02602, 02702 AKAI 00602, 02302, 04902, 05902, 06602 AKIBA 01402 ALBA 01402, 02102, 02302, 02702 AMERICA ACTION LOEWE OPTA 04602 LOGIK 01402, 02002 LUXOR 00802, 01102, 01602, 04902 LXI 00402, 05702, 05902 M ELECTRONIC 00002, 04702 MAGNASONIC 04302 MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302, 00502, 01502, 05602, 05902, 06402 MAGNIN 02002, 05502 MANESTH 00902, 01402 MARANTZ 00302, 01502, 04602, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06402 MARTA 00402, 05702 MATSUI 02602, 02702, 05002 MATSUSHITA 00302, 06402 MEDION 02602 MEI 00302, 06402 MEMOREX 00002, 00302, 00402, 00502, 01002, 01102, 01602, 02002, 02202, 02602, 04202, 04702, 05502, 05702, 05902, 06102, 06302 06402 MEMPHIS 01402 METZ 00402, 02502, 04502, 04602, 05202 MGA 00802, 02002 MGN TECHNOLOGY 02002, 05502 MINERVA 04602 MINOLTA 00702, 06202, 06502 MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802, 01302, 01502, 03502, 05802, 06002, 06202 MOTOROLA 00302, 01102, 06402 MTC 00002, 02002, 04702, 05502, 05902, 06302 MULTITECH 00002, 01402, 04702, 05502, 05902, 06302 MURPHY 00002, 04702 MYRYAD 01502 NAD 01602 NATIONAL 01902, 04802 NEC 00302, 00402, 00602, 01102, 01302, 01602, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06602 NECKERMANN 01502, 04602, 05002 NESCO 01402 NEWAVE 00402 NIKKO 00402, 05702 NOBLEX 02002, 05502 NOBLIKO 04602 NOKIA 00602, 01602, 02002, 04902 NORDMENDE 00602, 02402 OCEANIC 00002, 00602 OKANO 02302, 02602 OLYMPUS 00302, 01902, 04802, 06402 OPTIMUS 00402, 01102, 01602, 02802, 05502, 05702 OPTONICA 05502 ORION 01702, 02602, 02702, 04402, 05002 OSAKA 04702 OSAKI 00002, 00402, 01402, 04702 OTTO VERSAND 01502 PALLADIUM 00402, 00602, 01402 PANASONIC 00302, 01802, 01902, 03102, 03702, 04502, 04802, 05102, 05302, 05602, 06402 PATHE MARCONI 00602 PENNEY 00302, 00402, 00702, 02002, 03702, 04202 ADVANCED OPERATION DENON LG LOEWE MARANTZ ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER SAMSUMG SHARP SONY YAMAHA 01402 01002, 01602, 05402, 06102 FUJI 00202, 00302, 06402 FUJITSU 00002, 00902 FUNAI 00002, 04702, 05902, 06302 GARRARD 00002, 06302 GE 00302, 01202, 02002, 03502, 03702, 03802, 05502, 05602, 06402 GEC 01502 GENERAL 00902 GO VIDEO 02802 GOLDHAND 01402 GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802, 02902, 04202, 05402, 05702, 05902 GOODMANS 00002, 00402, 01402, 02102, 04702 GO-VIDEO 05502 GRADIENTE 00002, 06302 GRAETZ 00602, 01602, 02002 GRANADA 01502, 01602 GRANADA (UK) 04602, 04802 GRANDIN 00002, 00402, 01402 GRUNDIG 01402, 01502, 01902, 02502, 04602 HANSEATIC 00402 HARLEY DAVIDSON 00002, 06302 HARMAN KARDON 05402 HARMAN/KARDON 01502 HARWOOD 01402 HCM 01402 HEADQUARTER 05902, 06102, 06502, 06602 HINARI 01402, 02002, 02702, 05002 HI-Q 01002 HITACHI 00002, 00402, 00602, 00702, 02002, 04702, 06202 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 00702 HYPSON 01402 IMPERIAL 00002, 04702 INSIGNIA 05702 INSTANT REPLAY 05902, 06402 INTEQ 05702 INTERFUNK 01502 ITT 00602, 01602, 02002, 04902 ITT-NOKIA 04902 ITV 00402, 02102 JC PENNEY 05402, 05502, 05602, 05702, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06202, 06402, 06502, 06602, 06702 JCL 06402 JENSEN 00602, 06202, 06602 JVC 00602, 00902, 01302, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06602 KAISUI 01402 KEC 00402, 02102 KENDO 04902 KENWOOD 00602, 01302, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06602 KLH 01402 KODAK 00302, 00402, 05702, 06402 KOLIN 00602, 00802 KORPEL 01402 LENCO 02102 LEYCO 01402 LG 00402, 00702, 00902, 02902, 05902 LLOYD 04702, 05902, 06302 LLOYD’S 00002 LOEWE 00402, 01502, 04502 FISHER PLAYBACK FEATURES BD PLAYER 02102 AMERICAN HIGH 00302, 06402 AMSTRAD 00002, 04702 ANAM 00402, 01902, 02002, 02102, 02902 ANAM NATIONAL 01902, 04502 ANITECH 01402 ASA 00402, 01502 ASHA 02002, 05502 ASUKA 00402 AUDIO DYNAMICS 05402, 05802, 06002 AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102, 05702 BAIRD 00002, 00602, 01602, 04902 BASIC LINE 01402, 02102 BEAUMARK 02002, 05502 BELL & HOWELL 01602, 06102 BLAUPUNKT 01902, 04602, 04802, 05102, 05302 BRANDT 02402 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 00602 BROKSONIC 01702, 02602, 04402 BUSH 01402, 02102, 02702 CALIX 00402, 05702 CANDLE 05402, 05502, 05702 CANNON 05602, 06402 CANON 00302 CARVER 01502 CCE 01402, 02102 CGE 00002, 04702 CIMLINE 01402 CINERAL 02102 CINEVISION 05702 CITIZEN 00402, 02102, 04302, 05402, 05502, 05702 COLORTYME 05402 COLT 01402 COMBITECH 02702 CRAIG 00402, 01002, 01402, 02002, 05502, 05702 CROWN 01402, 02102 CURTIS MATHES 00302, 00602, 01202, 03702, 05402, 05502, 05602, 05902, 06402 CYBERNEX 02002, 05502 CYRUS 01502 DAEWOO 00902, 01602, 02102, 03402, 04302, 06302 DANSAI 01402 DBX 05402, 05802, 06002 DE GRAAF 00702 DECCA 00002, 01502, 04702 DEGRAAF 04702 DENON 00702 DIMENSIA 05602 DUAL 00602 DUMONT 00002, 01502, 01602, 04702 DURABRAND 05702 DYNATECH 00002, 04702, 05902, 06302 ELCATECH 01402 ELECTROHOME 00402, 05702 ELECTROPHONIC 00402, 05702 EMEREX 00102 EMERSON 00002, 00302, 00402, 00802, 00902, 01702, 02002, 02102, 04302, 04402, 04702, 05002, 05502, 05702, 05902, 06102, 06302, 06402 ESC 02002, 02102 FERGUSON 00602, 02402 FIDELITY 00002, 04702 FINLANDIA 01502, 01602 FINLUX 00002, 00702, 01502, 01602, 04702, 04802, 04902 FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802, 00902, PREPARATION 00305, 01005, 02605, 08705 RIO 07405 ROADSTAR 05905 ROTEL 01305 SABA 06005 SAMSUNG 01105, 04505 SANYO 02005 SCHNEIDER 06005 SCOTT 05805, 06005 SEARS 07805 SHANGHAI 05805 SHARP 01405 SHERWOOD 03205 SHINCO 08705 SHINSONIC 00505, 08705 SINGER 05905 SKYMASTER 05605 SLIM ART 03305 SM ELECTRONIC 02805 SM ELECTRONICS 05605, 05905 SONY 00505, 04005 STANDARD 06005 SUPERSCAN 07805 SV2000 07805 SVA 05805 SYLVANIA 02205, 07805, 08405 SYMPHONIC 07805, 08405, 08605 TATUNG 03205 TEAC 01005, 02605 TECHNICS 00005 TENSAI 05905, 06005 TEVION 06005 THETA DIGITAL 01005 THOMSON 00305 TOSHIBA 00105, 04605 URBAN CONCEPTS 00105 VOXSON 05605 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 08405 XBOX 00305 YAMAHA 00005, 00705, 00805, 04305, 04405 YUKAI 05605 ZENITH 00105, 01205, 02905, 07405 ZEUS 03305 INTRODUCTION RCA 49 En PENTAX 00702, 05402, 06202, 06502 PERDIO 00002, 04702 PHILCO 00302, 05602, 06402 PHILIPS 00302, 01502, 03202, 03902, 04002, 04602, 06402 PHONOLA 01502 PILOT 00402, 05702 PIONEER 00702, 01302, 01502, 05802, 06002, 06202, 06702 POLK AUDIO 01502 PROFITRONIC 02002 PROLINE 00002, 04702 PROSCAN 01202, 03802, 05602 PROTEC 01402 PULSAR 00502 PYE 01502 QUARTER 06102 QUARTZ 06102 QUASAR 00302, 03702, 05602, 06402 QUELLE 01502, 04602, 04802, 05002 RADIO SHACK 05502, 05602, 05702, 05902, 06102, 06302, 06402 RADIOLA 01502 RADIOSHACK 00002 RADIX 00402, 05702 RANDEX 00402, 05702 RCA 00302, 00702, 01202, 02002, 03502, 03702, 03802, 05502, 05602, 05702, 06202, 06402, 06502 REALISTIC 00002, 00302, 00402, 01002, 01102, 01602, 04702, 05502, 05602, 05702, 05902, 06102, 06302, 06402 REOC 02602 REPLAYTV 03002, 03102 REX 00602 RIO 05702 ROADSTAR 00402, 01402, 02002, 02102 RUNCO 00502 SABA 00602, 02402 SAISHO 05002 SALORA 00802 SAMPO 00402, 01102 SAMSUNG 00902, 02002, 02802, 05502, 06202 SANKY 00502, 01102 SANSUI 00002, 00602, 01302, 04402, 05802, 06002, 06602 SANYO 01002, 01602, 02002, 05502, 06102 SAVILLE 02702 SBR 01502 SCHAUB LORENZ 00002, 00602, 01602 SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402, 01502, 04702 SCOTT 00802, 00902, 01702 SEARS 00002, 00302, 00402, 00702, 01002, 01602, 04202, 05702, 06102, 06202, 06402, 06502, 06702 SEG 02002 SEI 01502 SELECO 00602 SEMP 00902 SHARP 01102, 03502, 05902 SHINTOM 01402, 01602, 06202 SHOGUN 05502 SIEMENS 00402, 01502, 01602, 04602 SIGNATURE 05902 SILVA 00402 SINGER 00902, 01402, 06402 SINUDYNE 01502, 05202 50 En SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102 SONTEC 00402 SONY 00002, 00102, 00202, 00302, 03302, 04102, 04702 STS 00702, 06202, 06402, 06502 SUNKAI 02602 SUNSTAR 00002, 04702 SUNTRONIC 00002 SYLVANIA 00002, 00302, 00802, 01502, 04702, 05602, 05902, 06302, 06402 SYMPHONIC 00002, 04702, 05902, 06302 TANDBERG 05002, 05202 TANDY 00002, 01602, 05902, 06102 TASHIKO 00002, 00402, 04702, 05702 TATUNG 00002, 00602, 00902, 01302, 01502, 04702, 06602 TEAC 00002, 00602, 02102, 02202, 03402, 04702, 05902, 06302, 06602 TECHNICS 00302, 01902, 04802, 06402 TECO 00302, 00402, 00602, 01102 TEKNIKA 00002, 00302, 00402, 04702, 05702, 05902, 06302, 06402 TELEAVIA 00602 TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402 TENOSAL 01402 TENSAI 00002 THOMAS 00002 THOMSON 00602, 01202, 01302, 02402 THORN 00602, 01602 TIVO 03202, 03302 TMK 02002, 05002, 05502 TOSHIBA 00602, 00802, 00902, 01302, 01502, 03602, 06202 TOTEVISION 00402, 02002, 05502, 05702 UHER 02002 UNITECH 02002, 05502 UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402, 01502, 02002 VECTOR 00902 VECTOR RESEARCH 05402, 05802, 06002 VICTOR 00602, 01302, 05802, 06002 VIDEO CONCEPTS 00902, 05402, 05802, 06002 VIDEOMAGIC 00402 VIDEOSONIC 02002, 05502 VILLAIN 00002 WARDS 00002, 00302, 00702, 01002, 01102, 01202, 01402, 01502, 02002, 05502, 05602, 05702, 05902, 06202, 06302, 06402, 06502 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 01402, 05902 XR-1000 00002, 00302, 01402, 06302, 06402 YAMAHA 00602, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06602 YAMISHI 01402 YOKAN 01402 YOKO 02002 ZENITH 00002, 00202, 00502, 04402, 05702, 05802, 05902, 06002 CABLE TV TUNER ABC 00103, 00203, 02803, 04703 ADELPHIA ALLEGRO AMERICAST ANTRONIX ARCHER 04503 02903, 03403 02003 03703, 03803 03703, 03803, 04003, 04303 AT&T 04503 BELL SOUTH 02003 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 00803 BRITISH TELECOM 00103 CABLETENNA 03703 CABLEVIEW 03703 CENTURY 04303 CITIZEN 04303 COGECO 04503 COMCAST 04503 COMTRONICS 03103 CONTEC 03503 DAERYUNG 00203, 01403, 01903 DIRECTOR 01303 FILMNET 01203 GARRARD 04303 GC ELECTRONICS 03803 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 00103, 00803, 01303, 01703 GENERAL INSTRUMENT (GI) 02803, 04503, 04703, 04803 GOLDSTAR 00503 HAMLIN 00303, 00703 HITACHI 04703 JASCO 04303 JERROLD 00103, 00803, 01303, 01703, 02803, 04203, 04703 LG 00503 MAGNAVOX 03203 MEMOREX 00003 MNET 01203 MOTOROLA 00803, 01303, 01703, 02303, 02803, 04503, 04703, 04803 MOVIE TIME 03603 NOKIA 04903 NOOS 01803 NSC 03603 OAK 03503, 03903 PACE 00603, 02203 PANASONIC 00003, 00203, 00403, 02703 PARAGON 00003 PHILIPS 01003, 01103, 03203, 04303 PHILIPS-MAGNAVOX 03003, 03303 PIONEER 00503, 01603, 01903 PULSAR 00003 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 00103 QUASAR 00003 RADIO SHACK 03003, 03303, 03403 RCA 02403, 02503, 04303 REALISTIC 03803 REGAL 00703, 00903 REMBRANDT 04703 RUNCO 00003 SAGEM 01803 SAMSUNG 00003, 00503 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 00203, 01403, 01903 SHAW 04503 SIGNATURE 04703 SONY 02103 STARCOM 00103 SUPERCABLE 00803 TANDY 04103 TELE+1 01203 TOCOM 02803, 04203, 04403, 04803 TORX 00103 TOSHIBA 00003 TRANS PX 00803 TS 00103 TV86 03603 UNIKA 03703, 03803, 04303 UNITED CABLE 00103 UNIVERSAL 02903, 03703, 03803, 04003, 04303, 04603 VIEWSTAR 03103, 03203, 03603, 04103 VERIZON FIOS 05003, 05103 ZENITH 00003, 01503, 02003, 03403, 04303 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT 06404 ABSAT 00104 ALBA 01404 ALPHASTAR 02504 AMSTRAD 03004 ASTON 00304, 05004 ASTRO 00604 ATSAT 06404 AVALON 01304 BLAUPUNKT 00604 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 03004, 05204 CANAL DIGITAL 03104 CANAL SATELLITE 03104 CANAL+ 03104 CHAPARRAL 00804 CITYCOM 05304 COMAG 09004, 09104, 09704, 10104, 10304, 11604, 11704, 11804, 12004 CONNEXIONS 01304 CROSSDIGITAL 04604 CYRUS 00704 DAERYUNG 01304 DAEWOO 06304 D-BOX 02104, 04904 DIGENIUS 01104 DIRECTV 00904, 01204, 01504, 01704, 02204, 02304, 02804, 04104, 04604, 05104, 06904 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 02604, 03704 DISHPRO 02604, 03704 DISTRATEL 00004 DMT 04004 DNT 00704, 01304 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 05804 DREAMBOX 08604, 08704, 09604, 09804, 09904, 10004, 10404, 10604 ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304, 01604, 02604, 03104, 03604, 03704, 04304 ENGEL 03804 EXPRESSVU 02604 FINLUX 01404 FOXTEL 07004, 07104, 07204, 07304, 07404 FRACARRO 03604 FTE 03404 FUBA 01304 GALAXIS 03404, 04704 GE 01504 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 03504, 08204, 08304 GOI 02604 GOLD BOX 03104 GRUNDIG 00604, 03004 HIRSCHMANN 00604, 01304 HITACHI 01404, 02804 HOUSTON 08504, 10704, 10804, 11004, 11104, 11304, 11904 HTS 02604 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM WISI XSAT ZEHNDER ZENITH 00604, 01304, 01404 00104 04004 03304 INTRODUCTION PREPARATION PLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX 02304, 05104, 06904 03404, 05304 03604 02604 00104, 00604, 00704, 01004, 01804, 05604 KREISELMEYER 00604 LABGEAR 06304 LOGIX 03804 LORENZEN 01104 MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204 MANHATTAN 01404, 03804, 04204 MARANTZ 00704 MEDIASAT 03104 MEMOREX 02204 METRONIC 00004 MITSUBISHI 02304 MOTOROLA 03504 MYRYAD 00704 NEXT LEVEL 03504 NOKIA 01404, 02104, 02404, 04904, 05704, 06804 OCTALTV 03704 ORBITECH 04504 PACE 01404, 03004, 05204, 06604 PANASONIC 00904, 01904, 03004, 06504 PANDA 01404 PAYSAT 02204 PHILIPS 00204, 00704, 01404, 02004, 02204, 02304, 03104, 04104, 05104, 06904 PIONEER 03104 PRIMESTAR 08204, 08304 PROMAX 01404 PROSCAN 01204, 01504 RADIOLA 00704 RADIOSHACK 03504 RADIX 01304 RCA 00404, 01204, 01504, 03204 RFT 00704 SABRE 01404 SAGEM 02904, 04804, 05904 SAMSUNG 03804, 04604, 06004, 06204 SAT CONTROL 06404 SATSTATION 04204 SCHWAIGER 04704 SEEMANN 01304 SIEMENS 00604 SKY 03004, 03304, 05204, 12104, 12204, 12304 SKY HD 12404 SKY MASTER 07504, 07604, 07704, 07804, 07904, 08004 SKY+ (SKY Digital +) 08104 STARCHOICE 08204, 08304 SM ELECTRONIC 05404 SMART 08804, 08904, 09204, 09304, 09404, 09504, 10204, 10304, 10504, 10904, 11204, 11404, 11504 SONY 01704, 03004, 06704 STAR CHOICE 03504 STRONG 06404 TANTEC 01404 TECHNISAT 04404, 04504 TELESTAR 04504 THOMSON 01404, 03104, 03904, 06104 Tivo 08404 TOPFIELD 05504 TOSHIBA 02304, 02704, 06904 TPS 02904, 05904 ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704 UNIDEN 02004, 02204 UNIVERSUM 00604 VENTANA 00704 HUMAX INVIDEO JVC KATHREIN 51 En Index ■ Numerics 2-channel source surround decode ............................... 24 3Beam, beam mode ...................................................... 24 5.1ch beam mode .......................................................... 23 5.1-channel source 7.1-channel decode ........................ 24 5Beam, beam mode ...................................................... 23 5BeamPlus2, beam mode ............................................. 24 7.1ch beam mode .......................................................... 24 ■ A AC IN jack ..................................................................... 8 AC ON STANDBY, ADVANCED SETUP ................ 38 Adaptive DRC, Dynamic range control ....................... 34 Adaptive dynamic range control, Dynamic range control 34 Adjusting volume level automatically UniVolume ...... 28 ADVANCED SETUP .................................................. 37 Adventure. CINEMA DSP program ............................ 23 Attaching stands, installation ....................................... 10 Audio / video component connection ........................... 13 AUDIO DELAY, SOUND SET MENU ...................... 33 Audio delay, SOUND SET MENU .............................. 33 AUDIO IN jacks ............................................................. 8 Audio Sampling, input signal information ................... 29 AUDIO SELECT, HDMI setup ................................... 36 Audio select, HDMI setup ............................................ 36 AUTO DIMMER, Front panel display setup ............... 36 Auto dimmer, Front panel display setup ...................... 36 AUTO LIP SYNC, Audio delay .................................. 33 Auto Preset, option menu ............................................. 29 AUTO SETUP .............................................................. 15 AUTO SETUP, Error messages ................................... 18 Automatic lipsync, Audio delay ................................... 33 Automatic preset, option menu .................................... 29 AUX1/2, Audio delay .................................................. 33 AV button, Remote control ............................................ 9 AV key, controlling external component ..................... 39 ■ B BASS EXT indicator ...................................................... 7 BASS EXTENSION, SOUND SET MENU ................ 34 Bass extension, SOUND SET MENU ......................... 34 BASS OUT, Subwoofer settings .................................. 33 Bass out, Subwoofer settings ....................................... 33 Bass sound output redirection, Sound output ............... 35 BEAM ADJUSTMENT, MANUAL SETUP .............. 32 Beam adjustment, MANUAL SETUP ......................... 32 Beam mode, 5.1ch ........................................................ 23 Beam mode, 7.1ch ........................................................ 24 Blu-ray disc player connection ..................................... 12 ■ C cardboard microphone stand assemble ......................... 16 CENTER PRE OUT jack ............................................. 38 Center SP Size, Sound output ...................................... 35 Center speaker size for PRE OUT, Sound output ........ 35 CH key, controlling external component ..................... 39 CH keys, Remote control ............................................... 9 CHANNEL LEVEL, SOUND SET MENU ................ 34 Channel level, SOUND SET MENU ........................... 34 CINEMA DSP indicator ................................................. 7 CINEMA DSP program keys, Remote control .............. 9 CINEMA DSP programs .............................................. 22 Clear preset station, option menu ................................. 29 Clear Preset, option menu ............................................ 29 CODE SET key, controlling external component ........ 39 CODE SET key, Remote control ................................... 9 Concert Hall. CINEMA DSP program ......................... 23 Configuring input source settings ................................ 28 Connecting audio / video components ......................... 13 Connecting Blu-ray disc player .................................... 12 Connecting external components ................................. 12 Connecting FM antenna ............................................... 13 Connecting subwoofer .................................................. 14 52 En Connecting TV ............................................................. 12 Connections ................................................................. 12 Controlling external component .................................. 39 Corner installation, placement ..................................... 11 CROSS OVER, Subwoofer settings ............................ 33 Crossover, Subwoofer settings .................................... 33 Cursor keys, controlling external component .............. 39 Cursor keys, Remote control ......................................... 9 Customizing this unit ................................................... 30 ■ D Decoder indicators ................................................... 7, 21 Decoder Mode, option menu ....................................... 29 Decoder mode, option menu ........................................ 29 DEMO MODE, ADVANCED SETUP ....................... 38 Demo mode, ADVANCED SETUP ............................ 38 DIGITAL IN jacks ......................................................... 8 Display language change ............................................. 15 DISPLAY MENU ........................................................ 36 Displaying input signal information ............................ 29 Displaying the Radio Data System information .......... 26 DISTANCE, Subwoofer settings ................................. 33 Distance, Subwoofer settings ....................................... 33 Dolby Digital Plus, glossary ........................................ 43 Dolby Digital Surround EX, glossary .......................... 43 Dolby Digital, glossary ................................................ 43 Dolby Pro Logic II, glossary ....................................... 43 Dolby Pro Logic IIx, glossary ..................................... 43 Dolby Surround, glossary ............................................ 43 Dolby TrueHD, glossary .............................................. 43 Dolby/DTS DRC, Dynamic range control ................... 34 Drama. CINEMA DSP program .................................. 23 DRC:Dynamic Range CTRL, SOUND SET MENU .. 34 DTS 96/24, glossary .................................................... 43 DTS Digital Surround, glossary .................................. 43 DTS Neo:6, glossary .................................................... 43 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, glossary ................. 43 DTS-HD Master Audio, glossary ................................ 43 Dynamic range control, SOUND SET MENU ............ 34 Dynamic range of Dolby Digitaland DTS signals, Dynamic range control ............................................ 34 ■ E ENHANCER indicator .................................................. 7 ENTER key, controlling external component ............. 39 ENTER key, Remote control ......................................... 9 ENTERTAINMENT. CINEMA DSP program ........... 23 Entertainment. CINEMA DSP program ...................... 23 Error messages, AUTO SETUP .................................. 18 External amplifier using .............................................. 38 External component connection .................................. 12 External component control ......................................... 39 External component operation keys, controlling external component ............................................................... 39 External component operation keys, Remote control .... 9 ■ F F.DISPLAY SETUP, DISPLAY MENU .................... 36 F.PANEL KEY, ADVANCED SETUP ...................... 37 FACTORY PRESET, ADVANCED SETUP .............. 38 Factory preset, ADVANCED SETUP ......................... 38 FM antenna connection ................................................ 13 FM ANTENNA jack ...................................................... 8 FM Mode, option menu ............................................... 29 FM receiving mode, option menu ................................ 29 FM tuner, troubleshooting ........................................... 41 FM tuning .................................................................... 25 Frequency tuning, FM tuning ...................................... 25 Front panel ..................................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 6, 7 Front panel display setup, DISPLAY MENU ............. 36 Front panel input key, ADVANCED SETUP ............. 37 Front panel key, ADVANCED SETUP ....................... 37 FRONT PRE OUT jacks ............................................. 38 Front SP Size, Sound output ........................................ 35 Front speaker size for PRE OUT, Sound output .......... 35 ■ G Game. CINEMA DSP program .................................... 23 General, troubleshooting .............................................. 40 Group ID, Wireless setup ............................................. 36 ■ H HDMI control function ................................................ 28 HDMI CONTROL, INPUT MENU ............................. 36 HDMI control, INPUT MENU .................................... 36 HDMI indicator .............................................................. 7 HDMI jacks .................................................................... 8 HDMI SETUP, INPUT MENU ................................... 36 HDMI setup, INPUT MENU ....................................... 36 HDMI, Audio delay ..................................................... 33 HDMI, glossary ............................................................ 44 ■ I IMAGE LOCATION, MANUAL SETUP .................. 32 Image location, MANUAL SETUP ............................. 32 INFO key, Remote control ............................................. 9 INPUT ASSIGNMENT, INPUT MENU ..................... 35 Input assignment, INPUT MENU ................................ 35 Input channel indicators ........................................... 7, 22 INPUT key, Front panel ................................................. 6 INPUT MENU ............................................................. 35 INPUT RENAME, INPUT MENU .............................. 35 Input rename, INPUT MENU ...................................... 35 Input selector keys, Remote control ............................... 9 Input signal information display .................................. 29 Input source setting configuration ................................ 28 Installing batteries, remote control ............................... 14 IntelliBeam ................................................................... 15 INTELLIBEAM key, Remote control ........................... 9 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack ............................................. 6 iPod Interlock, Wireless setup ...................................... 36 iPod interlock, Wireless setup ...................................... 36 iPod, troubleshooting ................................................... 42 iPod/iPhone playback ................................................... 27 IR IN terminal ................................................................ 8 IR-OUT terminal ............................................................ 8 ■ J Jazz Club. CINEMA DSP program ............................. 23 ■ L LANGUAGE SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ................... 37 Language setup, DISPLAY MENU ............................. 37 LFE 0.1-channel, glossary ............................................ 44 LFE Level, Sound output ............................................. 35 LFE LEVEL, Subwoofer settings ................................ 33 Linear PCM, glossary ................................................... 44 Loading settings ........................................................... 19 Low-frequency effect level for PRE OUT, Sound output . 35 Low-frequency effect level, Subwoofer settings ......... 33 ■ M MANUAL SETUP ....................................................... 31 MAX VOLUME SET, ADVANCED SETUP ............. 37 Maximum volume setting, ADVANCED SETUP ....... 37 Mch Stereo. CINEMA DSP program ........................... 23 MEMORY PROTECT, ADVANCED SETUP ........... 38 Memory protect, ADVANCED SETUP ...................... 38 MENU key, controlling external component ............... 39 MENU key, Remote control .......................................... 9 MOVIE. CINEMA DSP program ................................ 23 Movie. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23 Multi-information display .............................................. 7 MUSIC ENHANCER, SOUND SET MENU .............. 34 Music Video. CINEMA DSP program ........................ 23 MUSIC. CINEMA DSP program ................................ 23 ■ N Numeric keys, controlling external component .......... 39 Numeric keys, Remote control ...................................... 9 ■ O ■ P ■ R R.INPUT POWER, ADVANCED SETUP ................. 38 Rack using, installation ............................................... 10 Radio Data System tuning ........................................... 26 Rear panel ...................................................................... 8 RECV, Wireless indicators ............................................ 7 Remote control .............................................................. 9 Remote control code list .............................................. 45 Remote control code resetting all ................................ 39 Remote control code setting ........................................ 39 Remote control preparation ......................................... 14 Remote control sensor ................................................... 6 Remote control, troubleshooting ................................. 41 Resetting all remote control code ................................ 39 Resolution, input signal information ........................... 29 RETURN key, controlling external component .......... 39 RETURN key, Remote control ..................................... 9 RS-232C terminal .......................................................... 8 ■ S T Table top stand/floor stand using, installation ............. 10 Talk Show. CINEMA DSP program ........................... 23 TONE CONTROL, SOUND SET MENU .................. 33 Tone control, SOUND SET MENU ............................ 33 TOP MENU key, controlling external component ...... 39 TOP MENU key, Remote control .................................. 9 Transmission indicator, Remote control ........................ 9 TREBLE, Tone control ................................................ 33 Treble, Tone control .................................................... 33 TRNS, Wireless indicators ............................................ 7 Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40 Tuner indicators ............................................................. 7 Tuner operation keys, Remote control ........................... 9 TURN ON VOLUME, ADVANCED SETUP ............ 37 TV ................................................................................ 33 TV button, Remote control ............................................ 9 TV connection .............................................................. 12 TV INPUT key, controlling external component ........ 39 TV key, controlling external component ..................... 39 TV MUTE key, controlling external component ......... 39 TV operation keys, Remote control ............................... 9 TV VOL +/– key, controlling external component ...... 39 TV, Audio delay .......................................................... 33 ■ U UNIT SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ............................... 37 Unit setup, DISPLAY MENU ..................................... 37 UNIVOLUME indicator ................................................ 7 UNIVOLUME key, Remote control .............................. 9 ■ SETTINGS V VIDEO jacks .................................................................. 8 Video Signal In, input signal information ................... 29 VOLUME +/– keys, Front panel ................................... 6 VOLUME +/– keys, Remote control ............................. 9 Volume level at power-on, ADVANCED SETUP ...... 37 Volume level indicator ................................................... 7 Volume Trim, option menu ......................................... 29 Volume trim, option menu ........................................... 29 ■ W wall mount bracket using, installation ......................... 10 Wireless Function, Wireless setup ............................... 36 Wireless function, Wireless setup ................................ 36 Wireless indicators ......................................................... 7 WIRELESS SETUP, INPUT MENU .......................... 36 Wireless setup, INPUT MENU ................................... 36 ■ APPENDIX Sampling frequency, input signal information ............ 29 Saving settings ............................................................. 19 Sci-Fi. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23 SET MENU ................................................................. 30 SET MENU operation ................................................. 31 Setting Loading ........................................................... 19 SETTING PARAMETERS, MANUAL SETUP ........ 31 Setting parameters, MANUAL SETUP ...................... 31 Setting remote control code ......................................... 39 Setting saving .............................................................. 19 SETUP key, Remote control ......................................... 9 SLEEP indicator ............................................................ 7 SLEEP key, Remote control .......................................... 9 Sleep timer ................................................................... 28 SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG, SOUND OUT MENU . 34 Sound beam output configuration, SOUND OUT MENU 34 SOUND OUT MENU ................................................. 34 SOUND OUT, SOUND OUT MENU ........................ 34 Sound output redirection, Sound output ...................... 35 Sound output, SOUND OUT MENU .......................... 34 ■ PLAYBACK FEATURES PANEL INP.KEY, ADVANCED SETUP .................. 37 Parallel installation, placement .................................... 11 PCM indicator ............................................................... 7 PCM, glossary ............................................................. 44 Playback ...................................................................... 21 Playing back iPod/iPhone ............................................ 27 Power key, Ffront panel ................................................ 6 Power key, Remote control ........................................... 9 Power LED .................................................................... 6 Power-on by remote control input keys, ADVANCED SETUP .................................................................... 38 PRE OUT jacks ............................................................. 8 PRE OUT Volume, Sound output ............................... 35 PRE OUT volume, Sound output ................................ 35 Preset tuning, FM tuning ............................................. 25 PREPARATION Operation range, remote control .................................. 14 OPTION key, Remote control ....................................... 9 OSD BACK COLOR, OSD setup ............................... 37 OSD background color, OSD setup ............................ 37 OSD language change ................................................. 15 OSD SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ................................ 37 OSD setup, DISPLAY MENU .................................... 37 OSD SHIFT, OSD setup ............................................. 37 OSD shift, OSD setup ................................................. 37 SOUND SET MENU ................................................... 33 Specifications ............................................................... 44 Spectacle. CINEMA DSP program ............................. 23 Sports. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23 ST+3BeamPlus2, beam mode ...................................... 24 Stand attachment, installation ...................................... 10 STANDARD DIMMER, Front panel display setup .... 36 Standard dimmer, Front panel display setup ............... 36 Standby after AC on, ADVANCED SETUP ............... 38 STEREO key, Remote control ....................................... 9 Stereo+3Beam, beam mode ......................................... 23 Subwoofer connection ................................................. 14 SUBWOOFER jack ....................................................... 8 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack .................................... 38 SUBWOOFER SET, SOUND SET MENU ................ 33 Subwoofer settings, SOUND SET MENU .................. 33 SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI setup ................................ 36 Support audio, HDMI setup ......................................... 36 SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks ...................................... 38 SUR.DECODE key, Remote control ............................. 9 SURROUND key, Remote control ................................ 9 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ..................................... 38 System configurations .................................................. 37 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal ................................ 8 System memory using .................................................. 19 INTRODUCTION Music. CINEMA DSP program .................................. 23 MUTE key, Remote control .......................................... 9 Muting audio output .................................................... 21 X x.v.Color, glossary ....................................................... 44 53 En © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. YC174B0/OMEN2
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54

Yamaha YSP-4100 Handleiding

Categorie
Ontvanger
Type
Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor